WO2013128487A1 - Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method - Google Patents

Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013128487A1
WO2013128487A1 PCT/JP2012/001364 JP2012001364W WO2013128487A1 WO 2013128487 A1 WO2013128487 A1 WO 2013128487A1 JP 2012001364 W JP2012001364 W JP 2012001364W WO 2013128487 A1 WO2013128487 A1 WO 2013128487A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
program
information
reservation
recording
program information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2012/001364
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
町田 芳広
田中 真愉子
岡本 宏夫
幸松 孝憲
Original Assignee
日立コンシューマエレクトロニクス株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日立コンシューマエレクトロニクス株式会社 filed Critical 日立コンシューマエレクトロニクス株式会社
Priority to PCT/JP2012/001364 priority Critical patent/WO2013128487A1/en
Publication of WO2013128487A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013128487A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/235Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
    • H04N21/2355Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors involving reformatting operations of additional data, e.g. HTML pages
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/25Management operations performed by the server for facilitating the content distribution or administrating data related to end-users or client devices, e.g. end-user or client device authentication, learning user preferences for recommending movies
    • H04N21/258Client or end-user data management, e.g. managing client capabilities, user preferences or demographics, processing of multiple end-users preferences to derive collaborative data
    • H04N21/25808Management of client data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/60Network structure or processes for video distribution between server and client or between remote clients; Control signalling between clients, server and network components; Transmission of management data between server and client, e.g. sending from server to client commands for recording incoming content stream; Communication details between server and client 
    • H04N21/65Transmission of management data between client and server
    • H04N21/658Transmission by the client directed to the server
    • H04N21/6582Data stored in the client, e.g. viewing habits, hardware capabilities, credit card number
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/80Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
    • H04N21/83Generation or processing of protective or descriptive data associated with content; Content structuring
    • H04N21/84Generation or processing of descriptive data, e.g. content descriptors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47End-user applications

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a digital broadcast receiver.
  • Patent Document 1 JP-A-2007-510330.
  • Patent Document 1 JP-A-2007-510330.
  • a method is provided which allows to establish a connection between multiple UpnP compliant resources.
  • Each resource has a separate connection manager service.
  • the method is at a predetermined time.
  • In order to negotiate the connection between each resource to be established it comprises setting up the respective connection manager service to enable the UpnP control point to use its respective service. (See summary).
  • Patent Document 1 does not describe a method for providing program information of content to be scheduled for recording. Therefore, the present invention provides a program information transmitting apparatus for providing program information via a network.
  • a program information transmitting apparatus for providing program information through a network
  • a program information receiving apparatus for acquiring program information through a network
  • FIG. 1 It is a figure which shows an example of the electronic program guide which the acquisition program schedule production
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a start processing flow of an integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of an EPG generation processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610. It is a figure which shows an example of an operating device.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of an EPG display processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition table of the integrated program schedule production
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the request
  • the present embodiment describes a reservation recording method via a network in which a program information receiving apparatus makes a program information transmitting apparatus a reservation recording setting of a broadcast program using program information acquired from a program information transmitting apparatus via a network. Do.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of the system configuration of this embodiment.
  • Reference numeral 1 denotes a user's home for receiving broadcasts, 2 and 3 broadcast stations, 4 an external network, and 5 a transmission path for transmitting broadcasts transmitted by the broadcast station 3.
  • the broadcasting station 2 and the broadcasting station 3 transmit broadcasts by different broadcasting methods.
  • the broadcasting station 2 transmits terrestrial digital broadcasting using terrestrial waves
  • the broadcasting station 3 transmits digital cable television (CATV) broadcasting via the transmission path 3
  • CATV digital cable television
  • the broadcast systems of the broadcast station 2 and the broadcast station 3 may be different systems, and may be a combination of BS digital broadcast and CATV broadcast transmitted by satellite waves.
  • the user home 1, the broadcast station 2, and the broadcast station 3 may be connected to the external network 4.
  • the broadcast stations 2 and 3 can provide content and the like related to a broadcast program using a content server (not shown).
  • the user home 1 is connected to the content server from the external network 4 and can use the content provided by the broadcast stations 2 and 3.
  • 11 is a broadcast receiving antenna
  • 12 and 13 are distributors
  • 14 is a router
  • 15 is an access point
  • 16 is a hub
  • 110 and 120 are digital broadcast receiving apparatuses that receive CATV broadcasts transmitted by the broadcast station 3.
  • 130, 140, and 150 are digital broadcast receiving apparatuses for receiving terrestrial digital broadcasts transmitted by the broadcast station 2
  • 160 is a mobile device.
  • Reference numeral 20 denotes a room border of the user home 1.
  • the lower side of the boundary line 20 is the first floor of the user house 1 and the upper side is the second floor.
  • the broadcast receiving antenna 11 receives the terrestrial digital broadcast transmitted by the broadcasting station 2, and the received digital broadcast is distributed to the digital broadcast receivers 130, 140, and 150 capable of receiving the terrestrial digital broadcast through the distributor 12.
  • 130 is a digital television (DTV)
  • 140 is a digital television (DTV with a recording function) having a recording function
  • 150 is a recorder as an example.
  • the CATV broadcasts sent from the broadcast station 3 are sent to the user home 1 via the transmission path 5 and distributed to the digital broadcast receivers 110 and 120 capable of receiving the CATV broadcasts via the distributor 13.
  • a CATV broadcast receiver 110 a set top box (STB with a recording function) having a recording function is shown as an example and a set top box (STB) 120 is shown as an example.
  • STB set top box
  • the digital broadcast received by the recording STB 110 and the STB 120 and the content reproduced by the recording STB 110 are output to the DTV 130 and displayed.
  • the digital broadcast receivers 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 of the user home 1 can be connected to each other via the hub 16, and devices connected to the hub 16 construct a home network of the user home 1, and the router 14 Can also connect to external networks via
  • the mobile device 160 is connected to the hub 16 via the access point 15 and becomes a device configuring a home network.
  • the digital broadcast receivers 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 can be connected to each other through the hub 16 and can also be connected to an external network through the router 14.
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as the program information transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network.
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 140 operates as a program information receiving apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” that acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information.
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 is referred to as a program information transmitting apparatus 110
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 140 is referred to as a program information receiving apparatus 140.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to this embodiment.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 includes a tuner unit 201, a demodulation and decoding unit 202, a demax unit 203, an audio decoding unit 205, a video decoding unit 206, a data decoding unit 207, a synthesizing unit 208, a network connection unit 209, a recording and reproducing unit 210, and control. 211, memory 213, input / output unit 214, operation I / F unit 215, limited reception I / F unit 216, limited reception information storage unit 217, antenna connection terminal 221, digital audio signal output terminal 222, digital video signal output terminal 223 It is a digital broadcast receiving apparatus having a network terminal 224 and an operation signal receiving unit 226 and receiving CATV broadcasts.
  • the CATV broadcast is input to the tuner 201 from the antenna connection terminal 221.
  • the tuner 201 extracts the channel frequency band of the channel to be received, and outputs the extracted channel frequency band to the demodulation and decoding unit 202 as a baseband signal by orthogonal demodulation.
  • the demodulation and decoding unit 202 performs synchronous demodulation on the baseband signal using, for example, 8 PSK (Phase Shift Keying), performs error correction such as Viterbi decoding and RS (Reed Solomon) decoding, and decodes the digital broadcast signal. And output to the demax unit 203.
  • 8 PSK Phase Shift Keying
  • error correction such as Viterbi decoding and RS (Reed Solomon) decoding
  • the demux unit 203 separates and extracts an audio signal, a video signal, a subtitle and a data broadcast signal to be used in the subsequent stage from the multiplexed MPEG2-TS. Then, the key information etc. stored in the limited reception information storage unit 217 is acquired via the limited reception I / F unit 217, and using this information, the scramble applied to the MPEG2-TS for copyright protection is performed. It cancels and outputs data such as PES (Packetized Elementary Stream) or ES (Elementary Stream) which is a signal stream of video signals and audio signals and subtitles constituting contents such as a broadcast program, and data broadcasting.
  • PES Packetized Elementary Stream
  • ES Simple Stream
  • the audio decoding unit 205 decodes the PES or ES of the audio signal separated and extracted by the demax unit 203 and outputs the decoded signal to the digital audio signal output terminal 222.
  • the video decoding unit 206 decodes the PES or ES of the video signal separated and extracted by the demax unit 203 and outputs the decoded signal to the combining unit 208.
  • the data decoding unit 207 decodes the subtitles and data broadcast signals separated and extracted by the demux unit 203 and outputs the subtitles and the data broadcast signal to the combining unit 208.
  • the synthesizing unit 208 synthesizes the signals input from the video decoding unit 206 and the data decoding unit 207 to construct a display screen, and outputs the display screen to the digital video signal output terminal 223.
  • the network connection unit 209 includes a communication processing unit and a transmission content protection unit, and transmits / receives data and content to / from other devices connected to the hub 16 via the network terminal 224 or a remote server etc. connected to the network 3. .
  • the communication processing unit interprets the communication protocol and controls the flow of communication data.
  • the transmission content protection unit performs device authentication processing according to the copyright protection imposed on the content, performs encryption processing of the content to be output to the network, and performs decryption processing of the content received from the network.
  • the recording / playback unit 210 includes a recording medium and an encryption / decryption processing unit, records the received content such as a broadcast program or the content acquired via a network into the recording medium, and reads and outputs the recorded content from the recording medium Responsible for playback processing, deletion processing of recorded content, and the like.
  • the encryption / decryption processing unit performs appropriate encryption processing, and when the content is read from the recording medium, the encryption applied at the time of recording is decrypted and output.
  • the recording medium includes either or both of a non-removable recording medium such as a hard disk, or a removable recording medium such as an optical disk, a removable hard disk, and a memory card.
  • a non-removable recording medium such as a hard disk, or a removable recording medium such as an optical disk, a removable hard disk, and a memory card.
  • several types of recording media such as a hard disk, an optical disk, and a memory card may be provided.
  • the control unit 211 executes an operating system (OS) and an application, and causes the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to function.
  • OS operating system
  • the control unit 211 executes an operating system (OS) and an application, and causes the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to function.
  • the memory 213 is composed of volatile memory and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory stores software for operating the program information transmitting apparatus 110 such as an OS or an application.
  • Volatile memory temporarily stores data necessary for software operation.
  • the operation I / F unit 215 receives an input signal from the operation device 230 via the operation signal reception unit 226, and outputs the signal to the control unit 211.
  • the operating device 230 is, for example, a remote control, a mouse, a keyboard, a touch panel, or the like.
  • the operation signal reception unit 226 may wirelessly receive an input signal from the operation device 230 using infrared rays or the like, or may wire the operation device 230 via a connection terminal and receive the input signal.
  • a system bus 227 is a data bus connected to the components of the program information transmitter 110. It is used for communication of control signals and data signals between each component.
  • the conditional access I / F unit 216 is an interface for connecting the conditional access information storage unit 217.
  • the limited reception information storage unit 217 holds key information and the like for descrambling.
  • a digital audio signal output terminal 222 and a digital video signal output terminal 223 are digital audio signals uncompressed on an external television or the like to view contents such as a broadcast program received by the program information transmission apparatus 110 or a broadcast program recorded. , And an output terminal for outputting a digital video signal.
  • the digital audio signal output terminal 222 and the digital video signal output terminal 223 may be output from physically separated connectors, or may be implemented to be output from one connector using a connector having a plurality of output terminals. It is good.
  • a control signal output terminal may be assigned to the connector, and a display device control signal for controlling a display device externally connected such as a display may be output.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a program information receiving apparatus 140 according to this embodiment.
  • the same or corresponding parts as those in FIG. 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 has an audio output unit 301, a video display unit 302, an audio input switching unit 303, a video input switching unit 304, a digital audio signal input terminal 305, and a digital video signal input terminal in addition to the configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110. 306 is provided.
  • the audio signal decoded by the audio decoding unit 205 is output to the digital audio signal output terminal 222 and the audio input switching unit 303.
  • the video signal output from the combining unit 306 is output to the digital video signal output terminal 223 and the video input switching unit 304.
  • a digital audio signal input terminal 305 and a digital video signal input terminal 306 are terminals for inputting an external audio signal and video signal.
  • the input signal is output to the audio output unit 301 and the video display unit 302 via the audio input switching unit 303 and the video input switching unit 304.
  • the audio input switching unit 303 and the video input switching unit 304 control whether the signal input from the outside is output or the signal generated internally is output to the audio output unit 310 or the video display unit 302. It is controlled by 211.
  • the digital audio signal output terminal 222 and the digital video signal output terminal 223 may be output from physically separated connectors, or may be output from one connector using a connector having a plurality of output terminals. It may be implemented. Further, a control signal output terminal may be assigned to the connector, and a display device control signal for controlling a display device externally connected such as a display may be output.
  • the digital audio signal input terminal 305 and the digital video signal input terminal 306 may be output from the physically separated connector, or may be output from one connector using a connector provided with a plurality of output terminals. It may be implemented.
  • a control signal input terminal may be assigned to the connector, and a display device control signal for controlling the program information receiving device 140 as a display device may be input.
  • the control unit 211 decrypts the encryption for copyright protection, determines the number of gradations of the input video signal, and determines whether it is 2D video or 3D (stereoscopic) video based on the input control signal. It determines and thereby controls the display and sound to be output.
  • FIG. 4 is a view showing an example of the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 shown in FIG.
  • Control software 400 for realizing the function of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is expanded in the memory 213 of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and executed by the control unit 211.
  • the control software 400 includes a program guide generation unit 410, a program information processing unit 411, a program information conversion unit 412, a content management unit 413, a reservation management unit 414, a network communication processing unit 420, a message analysis unit 421, a message generation unit 422, and media distribution.
  • the application management unit 450 has a relationship such as control or data reference with almost all software blocks constituting the control software 400, the relationship lines with other software blocks are omitted because the figure becomes complicated.
  • the program guide generation unit 410 browses information on a program scheduled to be broadcast by the user using information on a broadcast program acquired with reference to the program information processing unit 411, selects a desired program, and selects a desired station.
  • An electronic program guide is provided that provides a user interface (UI) that enables recording of programs and reservation of viewing.
  • UI user interface
  • the program information processing unit 411 acquires program information such as a broadcast schedule and a program title from PES or ES including information on broadcast programs separated / extracted by the demax unit 203, and forms a program information table, Recording is performed in the recording / reproducing unit 210.
  • the program information processing unit 411 acquires program information of a broadcasting station that can be received by the receiving device. Then, each time the acquired program information is changed or new program information is acquired, the program information table is updated.
  • the program information is inserted into, for example, program specific information (PSI: Program Specific Information) of MPEG-TS or program sequence information (SI: Service Information).
  • PSI Program Specific Information
  • SI Service Information
  • the program information conversion unit 412 converts program information from a format used in digital broadcasting (hereinafter referred to as a broadcast format) into a format used in network transmission (hereinafter referred to as a network format) to obtain a network format program guide
  • the data is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording and reproducing unit 210.
  • the network format program guide data is updated in synchronization with the update of the program information table. Further, in response to the inquiry of the program information service 426, the program information conversion unit 412 extracts program information satisfying the query condition, and outputs the program information in a network format.
  • the content management unit 413 When the content management unit 413 records content in the recording and reproduction unit 210, the content management unit 413 generates content information of the content and records the content information in the memory 213 or the recording and reproduction unit 210.
  • the content information is, for example, program information such as an identifier (content ID) that uniquely defines the content, file name, size, type of content, data format, recording date and time, title name, genre, copy control information, and the like.
  • the type of content indicates video, audio, image or the like
  • the data format indicates a coding method of content such as MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) or MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3).
  • the content information is acquired from the program information processing unit 411 when the content to be recorded is a broadcast program, and acquired from the transmission source of the content in the case of the content acquired through the network.
  • association of content and content information, update of content information when content is deleted or moved, management of the number of copies for content with a limited number of copies, and the like are performed.
  • a UI for presenting a list of contents recorded based on the content information is generated and presented to the user. Furthermore, in accordance with the instruction of the user, the content selected by the user is reproduced, and processing of copying and moving is performed.
  • the reservation management unit 414 receives recording reservation and viewing reservation set by the user operating the electronic program guide and the like, and recording reservation specified by the reservation recording service 429, and manages reservation information.
  • the reservation information is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210.
  • the start time of the reserved program is monitored, and the channel to be received by the channel unit 201 is appropriately set, or in the case of a recording reservation, a stream constituting a content such as a broadcast program is recorded from the demax unit 203 to the recording / reproducing unit 210 It also performs setting processing when executing reservation, such as setting to output to.
  • the network communication processing unit 420 processes communication data in accordance with a communication protocol when transmitting and receiving content and control messages with other devices connected via a network.
  • the message analysis unit 421 interprets a message such as a control request generated according to a predetermined format transmitted and received between devices on the network, and distributes the requested control to a service that processes the control.
  • the service is a function provided by the device to another device, and the other device can use a service provided by the device by remote control via the network.
  • the media distribution service 423, the device information service 424, the content directory service 425, the streaming connection service 428, and the reservation recording service 429 correspond to this.
  • the message generation unit 422 is a message according to a predetermined format used among devices on the network, which is a response to a control request from another device or a control request for another device, which is output by various services. Generate with The generated message is created, for example, in a format as shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B, and is transmitted to another device by an appropriate communication protocol via the network communication processing unit 420.
  • the media distribution service 423 provides a service of transmitting designated content to another device via the home network or the public network 4.
  • the media distribution service 423 outputs contents such as a broadcast program received by the program information transmission apparatus 110 and a broadcast program recorded in the recording / reproducing unit 210 to the network communication processing unit 420 according to a request from another device. It also provides an interface for controlling the delivery of content, such as start / stop, pause, and skip of delivery via a network. Also, information on the corresponding transfer protocol is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210.
  • the transfer protocol is such as HTTP GET and Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP).
  • the device information service 424 provides the other device with device description information describing its own device, and service detailed information describing details of the service provided by the own device. Also, it notifies the home network when its own device connects to the network, leaves the network, and responds to device searches from other devices. Device description information and service detail information will be described later.
  • the content directory service 425 provides metadata information such as content titles and genres for all the content that the program information transmitting apparatus 110 can provide to other devices.
  • the content directory service 425 collects metadata information from the content information providing unit 427 for the content recorded in the recording and reproducing unit 210 and from the program information providing unit 426 for the EPG information of the broadcast.
  • the program information providing unit 426 refers to the program information conversion unit 412 and provides list information of organized channels, program list information of designated channels, information of each program, and the like according to a request from the content directory service 425.
  • the content information provision unit 427 refers to the content information created by the content management unit 413 according to the request from the content directory service 425, and provides list information of recorded programs, detailed information of a designated recorded program, and the like.
  • the streaming connection service 428 provides information on transfer protocols, content types, and data formats that the distribution service 423 supports.
  • the transfer protocol is acquired from the media distribution service 423, and the type and data format of the content are acquired with reference to the content information created by the content management unit 413.
  • the reservation recording service 429 sets registration and deletion of reservation recording via the network in the reservation management unit 414, and acquires and provides list information of recordings reserved and the like from the reservation management unit 414.
  • the application management unit 450 manages the operation of each software operating in the program information receiving apparatus 140.
  • the application management unit 450 performs control such as activating a predetermined application when receiving an input of a signal indicating pressing of a predetermined operation button from the operation device 230.
  • FIG. 5 is a software block diagram of the program information receiver 140 shown in FIG.
  • Control software 500 for realizing the function of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is expanded in the memory 213 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 and executed by the control unit 211.
  • the control software 500 includes a program guide generation unit 410, a program information processing unit 411, a content management unit 413, a network communication processing unit 420, a message analysis unit 421, a message generation unit 422, a device information service 424, a network reservation recording application 501, and an acquired program.
  • the management unit 450 is configured.
  • the network reservation recording application 501 is an application for providing the user with a reservation recording function via the network for performing recording reservation to another device on the home network.
  • the network reservation recording application 501 controls the device detection unit 530, the content directory controller 525, the reservation recording setting controller 529, etc., searches for other devices on the home network, acquires program information from the devices, and performs reservation recording. Set The process of the scheduled recording function via the network will be described in detail later.
  • the application management unit 450 and the network reservation recording application 501 have a relationship such as control or data reference with almost all software blocks constituting the control software 500, but the relationship with other software blocks is complicated because the figure becomes complicated. The line is omitted.
  • the acquired program guide generation unit 510 generates an electronic program guide for a broadcast acquired from another device with reference to the program information acquisition unit 526. This provides a user interface (UI) that enables selection of a broadcast program to be received by another device to select a station or to make a recording or viewing reservation of a desired program.
  • UI user interface
  • the reservation setting management unit 514 holds and manages information on reservation recording settings set to another device via the reservation recording setting controller 529.
  • the media reception controller 523 receives the content sent through the home network or the public network 4, and records the content in the recording / reproducing unit 210 or outputs the content to the demux unit 203.
  • a command for controlling the delivery of the content such as start, stop, pause, or skip of delivery, is sent to the content delivery source by the user operation.
  • information on the corresponding transfer protocol is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210.
  • the content directory controller 525 requests and acquires metadata information such as content title and genre according to an instruction from the network reservation recording application 501 or the like.
  • metadata information of the EPG is acquired, it is outputted to the program information acquisition unit 526, and when the metadata information of the content such as other video, audio and image is acquired, it is outputted to the content information acquisition unit 527.
  • the program information acquisition unit 526 records program information acquired from another device in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210 for program guide data. At this time, the device providing the program information is recorded in association with a network ID for uniquely identifying it on the home network. Further, the program information is output to the acquired program guide generation unit 510 in response to the reference request.
  • the content information acquisition unit 527 holds metadata information of the content acquired by the content directory controller 525, and generates a UI screen for providing the user with information of content that can be acquired via the network.
  • the streaming connection controller 528 requests information on transfer protocol, content type, and data format from other devices.
  • the scheduled recording setting controller 529 requests the other device to make settings for registration and deletion of scheduled recording, list information of scheduled recordings, and the like.
  • the device detection unit 530 detects a notification of connection or disconnection of another device to the network and detects the connection of the device to be controlled, acquires device description information of the device and service detailed information, and the network It is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210 in a format that can be referred to by an ID or a device type. Further, as the connection state management information, connection state information indicating the state of connection, update time information (value indicating date and time of connection or disconnection), and the like are recorded in a format that can be referenced by a network ID identifying the device. Also, if necessary, a device search request is sent to search for a desired control target device on the home network.
  • the connection state is updated to a value indicating withdrawal
  • the update time information is updated to the time at which the notification of withdrawal is detected.
  • the device description information of the detached device and the service detailed information may be deleted when the detachment is detected, or may be deleted after a predetermined time (such as 24 hours) has elapsed since the detachment.
  • the device description information includes information such as device information and a service information list.
  • the device information describes basic information about the device, and includes information such as device type, device name, manufacturer name, model name, serial number, network ID, version, and icon information.
  • the device type indicates the function provided by the device to the network.
  • a device with the function to deliver content such as video, audio, and EPG information is defined as a media server (MediaServer)
  • a device with a function to receive and play content via a network is defined as a media renderer (MediaRenderer) Do.
  • MediaServer media server
  • MediaRenderer media renderer
  • the network ID is an ID for uniquely identifying the device on the home network, and is held in the non-volatile memory of the memory 213.
  • the service information list is list information of services provided to the network by the device type implemented by the device.
  • Each service is composed of a service type, a service ID, a service description URL (Uniform Resource Locator), a control URL, an event URL and the like.
  • the device type is a media server (MediaServer)
  • services such as a content directory service (ContentDirectoryService), a streaming connection service (ConnectionManagerService), and a scheduled recording service (ScheduledRecordingService) are provided.
  • ContentDirectoryService Content Directory service
  • ConnectionManagerService streaming connection service
  • ScheduledRecordingService scheduled recording service
  • the service type indicates the function of each service, and the above-mentioned content directory or the like corresponds to this.
  • the service ID is an ID that uniquely identifies a service within the range of the device description information.
  • the service description URL is an access destination in order to acquire service detailed information describing details of a control method (action) for using control provided by the service.
  • the control URL is a transmission destination of an action command for performing control using a service.
  • the event URL is a registration destination that transmits an event delivery registration to receive a notification when an event occurs in a service.
  • the service detail information has information such as an action list and a service status table.
  • An action list is a list containing information on one or more actions.
  • An action is a description of a control method for using control provided by a service, such as an action name, and an argument list that is list information that defines an argument name, an input / output direction of an argument, and a type definition name for each argument.
  • the service state table is a table including one or more state variable information. State variable information includes information such as the type definition name of the argument used for action, the data type of the argument such as string and ui4, the default value as required, the list of settable values, and the range of settable values.
  • FIG. 6 shows an example of the device description information of the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • the device description information 600 has an additional function list 630 in addition to the device information 610 and the service information list 620, and the device defined by the device type 611 provides the additional function.
  • the device type is defined as "MediaServer" in the description of 611 in the device information 610.
  • Service information list 620 describes service information for each service provided by program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides services 621, 622, and the like.
  • the service 621 indicates that the service type 625 is "Content Directory", and that "Content Directory URL” described in the service description URL 626 can be accessed to acquire service detailed information.
  • CDControlURL described in the control URL 627 indicates the destination of the action request.
  • the additional function list 630 describes additional functions added to the basic functions of the device defined by the device type 611 as additional function types.
  • EpgServer 631 indicates that the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides an EPG server function of providing program information of the received broadcast.
  • EpgDirectScheduledRecorder 632 indicates providing an Epg direct scheduled recording function capable of setting scheduled recording of a program to be performed via the network using an ID property of a program item provided by the EPG server.
  • the other device is a media server to which the program information transmitting apparatus 110 distributes the content only by acquiring the device description information 600.
  • the EPG server function and the Epg direct reservation recording function are provided to other devices on the network as functions.
  • the EPG server function is provided by the content directory service 425.
  • the content directory service 425 provides metadata of content to be delivered to the network by the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to the device receiving the service, and provides a control method (action) of the provided metadata as service detailed information.
  • Examples of the contents to be distributed to the network include AV contents such as broadcast programs and pictures recorded in the recording / reproducing unit 210, and information contents such as program information and tuner information.
  • Metadata is property information on the content, such as the title, genre, and copy control information of the content.
  • FIG. 7 shows an example of the action list of the service detailed information of the content directory service 425. As shown in the figure, set an action name and an argument list for each action.
  • 710, 720, 730, 740, 750, 760, and 770 show each action.
  • the action name of the action 710 is 711 and the argument list is 712.
  • the argument list enumerates the information of one or more arguments.
  • FIG. 7 information of one argument is shown on one line.
  • Column 791 indicates an argument name
  • column 792 indicates an input / output direction (IN or OUT)
  • column 793 indicates a type definition name.
  • the detailed information of the type (state variable) indicated by the type definition name is described in the service state table of FIG.
  • FIG. 8 shows an example of the service status table of the service detailed information of the content directory service 425.
  • 810, 820, 830, 840, 850 and 860 are detailed information of the state variable.
  • the detailed information of the state variable includes the state variable name 831, data type 832, and a permitted value list 833 including one or more definitions (permitted values) 834 and 835 of values that can be set as needed.
  • An apparatus using the content directory service 425 can refer to the service state table using the type definition name of the argument of the action, and can acquire detailed information such as the data type name of the argument.
  • the type definition name of the Browse argument of the Browse argument of the action 720 is A_ARG_TYPE_BrowseFlag. If the type definition name is A_ARG_TYPE_BrowseFlag, this device refers to the service status table (FIG. 8), and from the detailed information 830 of the state variable whose name matches, the data type of the argument is string and the value that can be set is "BrowseMetadata" , "BrowseDirectChildren" can be known.
  • the request message and the response message of the action are encapsulated in a SOAP message and transmitted using, for example, the HTTP protocol.
  • the action name and input / output arguments are described in the SOAP body in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.
  • the destination of the action request is described in the service information list 620 of the device description information 600 as the control URL 627 for each service.
  • GetFeatureList 711 is an action that provides information such as the name of information content that can be provided when the content directory service 425 provides information content as well as AV content.
  • FIG. 9 is an example of FeatureList transmitted as a response message from the content directory service 425 in response to an action request of action GetFeatureList.
  • An XML document 910 describes FeatureList.
  • 920 is an XML header.
  • the ⁇ Features> tag describes a list of information of information content provided by the content directory service 425. Information of each information content is described by ⁇ Feature> tag as shown in 931 and 932.
  • the name attribute of the ⁇ Feature> tag indicates the name of the information content. "EPG” indicates that program information is provided, and "TUNER” indicates that tuner information is provided.
  • the ⁇ objectIDs> tag describes an ID for identifying the information content designated by the name attribute. In the case of providing a plurality of information contents, as shown at 932, the IDs are listed separated by ", (comma)".
  • the object ID of “EPG” corresponds to the @id property (FIG. 12) of the EPG container which is the root container of the provided program information.
  • the EPG container is provided in units of broadcasting systems such as CATV broadcasting, terrestrial digital broadcasting, and BS broadcasting. By providing on a broadcast system basis, a device having an EPG client function can easily search for a device that provides an EPG of a desired broadcast system, even when there are a plurality of devices having an EPG server function on the network.
  • An EPG container is a container that holds information of a broadcast system.
  • An EPG container (epg container) 1001 is a top-level root container of program information, and holds information of the broadcasting system.
  • the EPG container 1001 has as many channel containers as the number of organized channels provided by this broadcast system.
  • the channel containers define video channel containers (epgVideoChannel container) 1010 and 1020 indicating video broadcasts such as television broadcasts, and audio channel containers (epgAudioChannel container) 1030 indicating audio broadcasts such as radio broadcasts.
  • the channel container has program items that provide information on programs broadcast on that channel.
  • EPG video program items (video Program items) 1011, 1012, 1013, 1021, 1022, 1023 indicating video programs and EPG audio program items (audio Program items) 1031, 1032 indicating audio programs are defined.
  • the EPG container, the channel container, and the program item are collectively referred to as an EPG object.
  • the properties defined here are used for an EPG object which is program information in a network format.
  • the program information conversion unit 412 converts and generates program information using program information of a broadcast format used in digital broadcasting.
  • FIG. 12 shows containers for providing program information, and properties commonly defined for items. "@” Indicates that this property is attribute information.
  • attribute information In the program item, the attribute id is identification information that uniquely identifies the program described in the program item.
  • the attribute parentID indicates the attribute id of the channel container having the program item.
  • FIG. 13 shows an EPG container
  • FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (b) show video channel containers
  • FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (h) show property information of EPG video program items.
  • the property information of the audio channel container is omitted since it is different from the property of the video channel container of FIG. 14 and the value of the "catv: class" property.
  • object.container.epgContainer.epgAudioChannel write "object.container.epgContainer.epgAudioChannel” as a half-width character string.
  • the property information of the EPG audio program item will not be described because it is different only in the property of the EPG video program item in FIG. 15 and the value of the "upnp: class” property.
  • An EPG audio program item is described as "object.item.epgItem.audioProgram” as a single-byte character string.
  • FIG. 16 shows the case where the property definition is described in an XML document, using the EPG container as an example.
  • 1610 is an XML document of the EPG container. Since the EPG container is a container object, it is surrounded by ⁇ container> ⁇ / container> tags as shown in 1611 and 1615. Then, as indicated by a dashed line 1620, property information of the EPG container defined in FIG. 13 is listed in the ⁇ container> ⁇ / container> tag. As shown in the figure, each property name is described as an XML tag.
  • the id of 1162, the parent ID of 1163, and the restricted of 1164 are attribute information common to the container and item defined in FIG.
  • an id (attribute id) 1162 describes a value of network_id (network identification) included in the NIT as an identifier uniquely identifying a broadcast system that provides the EPG.
  • network_id network identification
  • parentID attribute parentID
  • the attribute ID of the parent container is described.
  • the attribute id of the upper container of the EPG container is described as "epgTop" on the assumption that the system can provide the EPGs of a plurality of broadcast systems.
  • the restricted (attribute restricted) 1164 describes whether the object can be modified.
  • the EPG information is basically information that can not be changed, obtained from program specification information (PSI) included in the received PES or ES of the broadcast, or program arrangement information (SI). Therefore, “1” indicating that change is not permitted is designated in the EPG object.
  • PSI program specification information
  • SI program arrangement information
  • the program identification information includes a network information table (NIT: Network Information Table) that describes information on transmission paths and the like, and the program arrangement information (SI) includes information on services (organized channels) such as a broadcast station Event description information such as a service description table (SDT) describing a program, a broadcast time of a program used in an electronic program guide, a program name (event name), and a program description describing the content of the program
  • NIT Network Information Table
  • Event description information such as a service description table (SDT) describing a program, a broadcast time of a program used in an electronic program guide, a program name (event name), and a program description describing the content of the program
  • EIT Event Information Table
  • the configuration is the same for other container objects such as video channel containers.
  • the ⁇ container> ⁇ / container> tag is the ⁇ item> ⁇ / item> tag.
  • the other configuration is the same as that of FIG.
  • the attribute id describes the value of service_id (service identification) included in the SDT as an identifier that uniquely identifies the organization channel.
  • the attribute parentID describes the attribute id of the parent container, that is, the EPG container of the broadcast system providing the organized channel. Referring to FIG. 10, in the attribute parentID of the video channel container 1010, the attribute id of the EPG container 1001 is described.
  • the attribute id describes the value of event_id (event identification) included in the EIT as an identifier for uniquely identifying the program.
  • the attribute parentID describes the attribute id of the parent container, ie, the channel container of the channel providing the program. Referring to FIG. 10, the attribute id of the video channel container 1010 is described in the attribute parentID of the EPG video program items 1011, 1012, 1013.
  • a container can contain one or more containers or items.
  • FIG. 17 is an example of an XML document in the case where the EPG container includes a channel container and a program item.
  • solid lines indicate containers or items, and broken lines indicate container property information or item property information. Containers or items have one or more property information.
  • reference numeral 1710 denotes an EPG container 1001, which includes a plurality of channel containers 1712 and 1718 inside. Further, channel container 1712 includes a plurality of program items 1714, 1716, and the like. Thus, the hierarchical structure of program information can be represented by an XML document.
  • 740, 750, 760 and 770 are actions defined to provide program information as an EPG server function. The details of each action are described below.
  • the X_EPG_ChannelLineup 741 of 740 is an action that returns list information of organization channels provided by the broadcast system.
  • ObjectID the identifier of the EPG container acquired by the "GetFeatureList" action is specified.
  • FIGS. 11A and 11B show an example of a request message and a response message of the “X_EPG_ChannelLineup” action.
  • FIG. 11A shows the request message “Request”
  • FIG. 11B shows the response message “Response”.
  • 1101 is an argument objectID given to the request message.
  • the identifier "catvEPG" 931 of the EPG container acquired by the "GetFeatureList” action is specified.
  • 1110 is an XML document which describes Result obtained by a request message.
  • 1120 is an XML header.
  • 1130, 1140 and 1150 are channel containers.
  • One channel container is represented by ⁇ container> ⁇ /container> tags, and the number is equal to the number of organized channels provided by the broadcast system.
  • the container id attribute is an identifier that uniquely identifies the container.
  • the parentID attribute is an identifier that identifies the parent container of this container. That is, a broadcast system providing this channel is shown.
  • the ⁇ restricted> attribute indicates whether the object can be modified. Here, “1” is designated to indicate that changing the program information is not permitted. When the change is permitted, “0” is designated.
  • the X_EPG_Program 751 is for returning information on the broadcast program provided by the broadcast system.
  • a broadcast system ID is designated as the input argument ObjectID
  • a list of information of all programs provided by the broadcast system is returned.
  • a channel ID is designated, a list of information of all programs provided by the channel is returned.
  • the ID of the broadcasting system is "catvEPG” (description of the objectIDs tag in FIG. 9, 931) acquired by the “GetFeatureList” action, and the channel ID is "ch-001" acquired by the "X_EPG_ChannelLineup” action. (B), id attribute 1132 of 1130's container tag, and the like.
  • the filtering condition of the program information to be acquired is input. For example, when it is desired to acquire program information of a program including soccer in the program name, it is described as "dc: title contains" soccer ". If the input argument TermCriteria is not specified, information on all programs provided by the object specified by the input argument ObjectID is returned.
  • FIG. 18 is an example of an XML document describing Result obtained in a response message to the “X_EPG_Program” action.
  • FIG. 18 shows an example where the channel ID "ch-001" is specified in the input argument ObjectID.
  • solid lines indicate items as in FIG. 17, and broken lines indicate item property information.
  • An item has one or more property information.
  • 1820 is an XML header.
  • a program item which is information of a broadcast program provided by the ID "ch-001" of the channel designated by the input argument ObjectID is represented by an ⁇ Item> tag.
  • Reference numerals 1831, 1833 and 1835 are program items, respectively.
  • the attribute id of the ⁇ Item> tag is an ID that uniquely identifies the item.
  • the attribute parentID is the ID of the parent container. That is, it indicates that this program is provided on channel "ch-001".
  • the ⁇ restricted> attribute indicates whether the object can be modified. Here, “1” is designated to indicate that changing the program information is not permitted.
  • Program items 1831, 1833, 1835 have respective property information as shown in 1832, 1834, 1836.
  • the ⁇ dc: title> tag of 1832 is an event name (program title) of a program as described in FIG.
  • the ⁇ upnp: class> tag, as described in FIG. 15 (h) defines the classification of objects, in this example, the classification of program items. object.item. epgItem. videoProgram indicates that this item is an EPG video program item.
  • the property information listed in 1832 is an example of the property information of the program item and is not all. Although no specific example is given for 1834 and 1836, the configuration is similar to 1832.
  • X_EPG_CurrentNextProgram 761 is for returning information on a program currently being broadcast and a broadcast program of a program scheduled to be broadcast next.
  • ObjectID a broadcast system ID
  • ObjectID a list of property information of current and next program broadcast programs is displayed for that channel. return.
  • the response message has the same format as that of FIG. 18 except that the program item included in the output argument Result is composed of the current broadcast program and the next broadcast scheduled program.
  • X_EPG_KeywordSearchProgram 771 is for returning property information of a program that satisfies the keyword.
  • ObjectID a broadcast system ID
  • ObjectID a list of property information of all broadcast programs of programs satisfying the keyword is displayed for that channel.
  • the response message has the same format as that of FIG. 18 except that the program item included in the output argument Result is configured by a program satisfying the keyword.
  • the input and output arguments of the actions 740, 750, 760, and 770 are an example.
  • an argument that limits the number of ⁇ container> or ⁇ item> included in the response may be added to limit the amount of data of the response.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 implements the EPG server function by providing the action of returning program information by the content directory service 425.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 connected to the network, and sets scheduled recording in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network.
  • FIG. 19 shows the procedure of the program information receiving apparatus 140 searching for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network and acquiring EPG server information.
  • the search process in the program information receiver 140 is executed as an EPG server search sequence of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • the device detection unit 530 of the program information reception apparatus 140 provides an EPG server function to search for an EPG server on the network via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • Search for MediaServer (DMS) Send a "device search" message to all the devices that make up the home network.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the “device search” message for searching the DMS processes the message with the device information service 424. Since the device type of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is MediaServer, the device information service 424 generates a message including a URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) indicating the acquisition destination of its own device description information, and responds to the program information receiving device 140. .
  • URI Uniform Resource Identifier
  • the device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving device 140 that has received the response accesses the URI included in the response message, and transmits a “device information request” message requesting device description information to the program information transmitting device 110.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “device information request” message to the acquisition destination URI of the device description information processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, a message including the device description information shown in FIG. 6 is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 140 responds. Device description information is described in the response message in a format such as XML.
  • the device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the response interprets the response message, and the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the content directory service 425 (Content Directory Service), the scheduled recording service 429 (Scheduled Recording Service), etc. , Accesses the service description URL of each service, and transmits a “service information request” message requesting the program information transmission device 110 for detailed information on the service.
  • Content Directory Service Content Directory Service
  • scheduled recording service 429 Service
  • Accesses the service description URL of each service and transmits a “service information request” message requesting the program information transmission device 110 for detailed information on the service.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “service information request” message to the service description URL of the content directory service 425 and the scheduled recording service 429 processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, a response message is generated using the service detailed information including the action list and the service status table, and the program information receiving device 140 is responded.
  • the device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the response passes the service detailed information of the content directory service to the content directory controller 525.
  • Detailed service information of the scheduled recording service is passed to the scheduled recording setting controller 529.
  • Each controller interprets service detail information and recognizes an action provided by each service.
  • the content directory controller 525 transmits the FeatureList action in order to confirm whether the content directory service of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the EPG according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the FeatureList action processes the message by the content directory service 425. Then, a message for returning information content list information provided by the program information transmitting apparatus 110 as shown in FIG. 9 is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 140 responds. Since the content directory controller 525 that has received the response message includes “EPG” in the name attribute of ⁇ Feature> 931, 932 included in the ⁇ Features> tag 930, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the program information It recognizes that it is an EPG server and obtains an ID for acquiring an EPG from its ⁇ objectIDs> tag (931).
  • the network reservation recording application 501 can transmit EPG server information such as device description information of the searched EPG server (program information transmitting apparatus) 110, detailed information of the service, and information content list information acquired by the FeatureList action to the EPG information of the program information transmitting apparatus 110. It is stored in the memory 213 in a format that can be referenced by a network ID or the like.
  • the sequence of S1912 to S1917 is performed for each program information transmitter, and the EPG of the EPG server (program information transmitter)
  • the server information is acquired and stored in the memory 213.
  • the number of found EPG servers is also stored in the memory 213.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the above procedure.
  • the execution timing of the search procedure may be when the program information receiving apparatus 140 is connected to the network or when the user requests a search for an EPG server on the network. Regardless of the user's request, searching when connected to the network has the advantage of being able to present the search results without having to wait for the user when requested by the user.
  • FIG. 20 shows the procedure of the program information receiving apparatus 140 acquiring EPG information from the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network.
  • the EPG information acquisition processing in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network reservation recording application 501 as an EPG information acquisition sequence.
  • the content directory controller 525 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits an X_EPG_ChannelLineup action in order to acquire list information of organization channels of the EPG provided by the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • ⁇ objectIDs> of an element whose name attribute of ⁇ Features> included in the information content list information acquired in S1917 of FIG. 19 is “EPG” is used as the input argument ObjectID.
  • the action message is sent out via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420. An example of the action message is shown in FIG.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the X_EPG_ChannelLineup action processes the message in the content directory service 425. Then, a response message as shown in FIG. 11B is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 140 is responded. From the response message, the content directory controller 525 which has received the response message obtains information such as the number of organized channels of the EPG to be provided, the type of broadcast of a television broadcast channel or a radio broadcast channel, and the ID of the organized channel.
  • the content directory controller 525 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits an X_EPG_Program action in order to obtain program information to be provided on each organized channel according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • the input argument ObjectID the id attribute (1132 in FIG. 11B) of the channel container, which is the ID of the organization channel acquired in S2011, is used.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the X_EPG_Program action processes the message in the content directory service 425. Then, it generates a response message as shown in FIG. 18 and responds to the program information receiving apparatus 140.
  • the content directory controller 525 having received the response message obtains, from the response message, information such as the title (event name) and the genre of each program, and an ID for identifying the program.
  • the network reservation recording application 501 repeats the processes of S 1712 and S 1713 for all the composition channels provided by the EPG server, acquires program information of all the programs provided by the EPG server, and records the program information in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210.
  • the acquired program guide generation unit 510 generates a program guide using the program information acquired by the above procedure.
  • the network reservation recording application 501 presents the generated program guide to the user, and causes the user to select a program for reservation recording.
  • FIG. 22 shows an example of the electronic program guide generated by the acquired program guide generator 510.
  • the electronic program guide 2200 includes a broadcast type field 2210, a broadcast system field 2211, a program schedule providing device field 2212, a broadcast date field 2213, a channel field 2216, time fields 2217 and 2218, and a program field 2219.
  • the broadcast type field 2210 is a field for displaying a broadcast type such as television broadcast or radio broadcast. Whether it is a television broadcast or a radio broadcast can be determined by the catv: class property of the channel container. In the case of television broadcasting, “object.container.epgContainer.epgVideoChannel” is set, and in the case of radio broadcasting, “object.container.epgContainer.epgAudioChannel” is set.
  • the screen configuration is different from the display.
  • the user switches whether to display a television broadcast electronic program guide or a radio broadcast electronic program guide using a broadcast switching button or the like assigned to the remote control.
  • the broadcast type column 2210 shows that the electronic program guide of the television is selected. In this way, it is displayed so that it can be judged visually which one is selected. If there is only one, only the broadcast type is displayed.
  • the broadcast system column 2211 represents the name of a broadcast system of an electronic program guide being displayed, such as cable television or digital terrestrial broadcasting.
  • the broadcast system name is acquired from the dc: title property of the EPG container. 2211 is an example in the case of acquiring only program information of one broadcast system. When program information for a plurality of broadcast systems is acquired, as in the case of the broadcast type column 2210, the user can select the broadcast system and switch the display.
  • the program guide providing device column 2212 is the name of the program information transmitting device 110 which provided the program information.
  • the name of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 displays, for example, the name of the device included in the device information 610 of the device description information 600. By indicating the name of the provider of the program information, it is possible to explicitly inform the user that the program information is obtained via the network.
  • the broadcast date column 2213 is a column for displaying the broadcast date provided by the program information, so that it can be selected for a predetermined number of days from the current day.
  • the selection method and display format are the same as in the broadcast type column 2210.
  • the channel column 2216 is a column that presents a list of channels provided by the broadcast system. Below the column of each channel column, program information of programs broadcasted on that channel is arranged. Channel list information is acquired using the X_EPG_ChannelLineup action as described above.
  • the channel field 2220 of one channel is composed of a channel name field 2221, an icon field 2222, and a channel number field 2223.
  • the channel column 2220 displays the organized channel name acquired from the upnp: channelName property of the channel container of the channel.
  • the icon column 2222 displays the organization channel logo acquired in the upnp: icon property of the channel container. The size of the logo is obtained from the upnp: icon @ arib: resolution property. If the channel container does not have the upnp: icon property, the channel number column 2223 is not displayed.
  • Time columns 2217 and 2218 are columns for displaying the time of broadcast.
  • the display time is arranged at the top.
  • the display time zone can be moved by the user's remote control operation or the like as in a general electronic program guide.
  • one time column is arranged on each side of the electronic program guide, but one or three or more time columns may be arranged depending on the size of the screen.
  • the program column 2219 is a column for displaying each program column 2230 which is program information of each program. As shown in the figure, each program column 2230 is arranged in a lattice form in the program column 2219. Each program column 2230 is arranged in the column of the channel column of the channel on which the program is broadcasted. The position of the vertical axis is determined by the program start time. For example, 1 hour column is divided into 4 by 15 minutes, and the start from 0 minutes to 15 minutes (not including 15 minutes) is the top position of 4 divisions, 15 minutes to 30 minutes (does not include 30 minutes) The start of the process is placed at the second position from the top of the four divisions.
  • the program start time is obtained from the program item's upnp: scheduledStartTime property. If the upnp: scheduledStartTime property does not exist, each program column 2230 of the corresponding program is not displayed.
  • the length 2234 in the time direction of each program column 2230 is calculated using either the upnp: scheduledEndTime property indicating the program end time as the property information of the program item, or the res @ duration property indicating the length of time of the program Do. For example, in the case where the length of time of the program is 2 hours, two minutes of the 1 hour column length are allocated, and in the case of 30 minutes, half of the 1 hour column length is allocated.
  • the length in the time direction 2234 is taken until the program start time of the next program.
  • Each program column 2230 includes a program start time display column 2231, a program name display column 2232, a program description display column 2233, and the like.
  • the value of the program start time is set, such as "15".
  • the value of time can not be displayed in the program start time display column 2231 because it can be determined by the position of the vertical axis of each program column 2230.
  • the program start time is acquired from the upnp: scheduledStartTime property.
  • the program title display column 2232 displays the program title acquired from the dc: title property of the program item.
  • the program description display column 2233 displays a program description acquired from the dc: description property of the program item.
  • the program name display column 2232 and the program description display column 2233 display information up to the number of characters that can be displayed.
  • Each program column 2230 may display an icon or the like indicating that the program content is paid. Whether the program is paid or free can be obtained from the program item's arib: caProgramInfo property.
  • the background color of the program name display column 2232 may be set according to the genre of the program such as drama and sports to make it easier to select a program.
  • the genre information of the program can be acquired from the upnp: genre property of the program item.
  • the configuration of the electronic program guide 2200 shown in FIG. 22 is an example.
  • the arrangement of the time column 2217 and the channel column 2216 may be interchanged, or program information for a predetermined number of days may be displayed for one channel.
  • the acquired program guide generation unit 510 generates the electronic program guide using the program information acquired from the program information transmission apparatus 110.
  • FIG. 21 shows the procedure of setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • the scheduled recording setting process in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network scheduled recording application 501 as a scheduled recording sequence.
  • the scheduled recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “scheduled recording object creation request” message for setting the scheduled recording of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information” which describes information of a program to be reserved.
  • reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation management unit 414 is referred to, and if there is no duplication of reservation, the program reservation is set in the reservation management unit 414.
  • a reservation ID which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording and a result which is information of the reservation result are returned.
  • FIG. 24 shows an example of a request message and a response message of the “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing the Epg direct reservation recording.
  • “Request” is a request message.
  • Reference numeral 2410 denotes an XML document in which an argument “reservation information” to be given to the request message is described.
  • 2411 is an XML header, and 2412 is an item object representing the value of the argument “reservation information”.
  • the item id (attribute id) is a reservation ID that uniquely identifies a scheduled recording. Since the attribute id is set by the program information transmitting apparatus 110, no value is designated in the request message of the "scheduled recording object creation request" action for requesting scheduled recording.
  • the ⁇ title> tag 2413 is a program name of a program to be reserved and recorded.
  • the value of the dc: title property of the program item of the program selected by the user from the electronic program guide 2200 is set.
  • the ⁇ class> tag 2414 indicates the classification of the item object 2412. “Object.recordschedule.direct.cdsepg” of 2414 represents that it is an item object for setting the Epg direct reservation recording.
  • the ⁇ scheduledCDSObjectID> tag 2415 an ID for specifying a program to be scheduled and recorded by the EPG server that has provided the program information is set. Therefore, the attribute id of the program item of the program selected by the user is set.
  • “Response” is a response message.
  • An output argument “reservation ID” 2420 is set to an ID uniquely identifying a reservation recording. This reservation ID is used, for example, when deleting the set scheduled recording.
  • 2430 is an XML document which describes "Result” which is information of reservation result.
  • 2431 is an XML header, and 2432 is an item object representing the value of "Result”.
  • a reservation ID for uniquely identifying a reserved recording is set. This value is equal to the value set in 2420.
  • the ⁇ title> tag 2433 is the same as 2413
  • the ⁇ class> tag 2434 is the 2414
  • the ⁇ scheduledCDSObjectID> tag 2435 is the same as 2415.
  • the ⁇ mediaRemainAlertID> tag 2436 is used to notify of a warning about the remaining amount of medium when the program information transmitting apparatus 110 for which scheduled recording has been set executes scheduled recording.
  • the value “0” indicates that there is no fear of the remaining amount being insufficient
  • the value “1” indicates that recording may not be possible because the remaining amount is insufficient.
  • FIG. 25A shows an example of the request message and the response message of the “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing standard reservation recording that is not Epg Direct.
  • the setting is made in this format.
  • Request is a request message.
  • An XML document 2510 describes an argument “reservation information” to be provided to the request message.
  • Reference numeral 2511 denotes an XML header, and reference numeral 2512 denotes an item object representing the value of the argument “reservation information”.
  • the attribute id is a reservation ID that uniquely identifies a scheduled recording. Since the attribute id is set by the program information transmitting apparatus 110, no value is designated in the request message of the "scheduled recording object creation request" action for requesting scheduled recording.
  • the ⁇ title> tag 2513 is the same as 2413.
  • “object.recordschedule.direct.cdsNonepg” is set to indicate that the recording is a standard reservation recording that is not Epg Direct.
  • There is no ⁇ scheduledCDSObjectID> tag because what is requested is standard recording that is not Epg Direct, and a program to be scheduled and recorded is specified by the channel number, the program start time, and the program duration.
  • the ⁇ scheduledChannelID> tag 2515 designates the channel number of the program selected by the user, and sets the upnp: channelNr property of the program item.
  • the ⁇ scheduledStartDateTime> tag 2516 is a program start time, and sets upnp: scheduledStartTime property of the program item.
  • the ⁇ scheduledDuration> tag 2517 is a length of a program time, and sets a res @ duration property of a program item.
  • FIG. 25 (b) shows another format of the argument "reservation information" of the standard reservation recording. Use this format if the res @ duration property is not provided.
  • the program end time is set instead of the ⁇ scheduledDuration> tag 2517.
  • the upnp: scheduledEndTime property of the program item is set.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the EPG information to other devices on the network, and uses the program information obtained from the EPG information to make a reservation recording in the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 which is an EPG client mounted apparatus according to the present embodiment searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which is an EPG server mounted apparatus connected to a network, acquires EPG information, and obtains electronic information from the information. Generate a program guide screen and present it to the user. Then, the user is provided with means for selecting the presented program and performing scheduled recording. Therefore, the user can set the scheduled recording on the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network in the same way as setting the scheduled recording on the device being operated.
  • the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, but includes various modifications.
  • the embodiments described above are described in detail in order to explain the present invention in an easy-to-understand manner, and are not necessarily limited to those having all the configurations described.
  • part of the configuration of one embodiment can be replaced with the configuration of another embodiment, and the configuration of another embodiment can be added to the configuration of one embodiment.
  • a program information receiving apparatus operates the operation device 230 such as a user's remote control to acquire program information from a program information transmitting apparatus connected via a network, generates an electronic program guide and presents it to the user. explain.
  • the configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, respectively. Further, the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is also the same as that shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 26 is a software block diagram of the program information receiving apparatus 140 according to the present embodiment.
  • the same or corresponding parts as those in FIG. 26 are identical or corresponding parts as those in FIG. 26.
  • Control software 2600 for realizing the functions of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is expanded in the memory 213 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 and executed by the control unit 211.
  • an integrated program guide generation application 2610 is added to the software configuration of the program information receiving apparatus 140 shown in FIG.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is an electronic program guide of a broadcast system received by the program information reception apparatus 140 itself generated by the program guide generation unit 410, and an electronic program acquired from the program information transmission apparatus 110 and generated by the acquired program guide generation unit 510. It is an application that allows the user to select a program guide without being aware of the difference in the provider of the electronic program guide information.
  • the network reservation recording application 2611 is an application for providing the user with a reservation recording function via the network for performing recording reservation to another device on the home network, as in the network reservation recording application 501 of FIG. 5 described above.
  • the network reservation recording application 501 is also responsible for the process of searching for an EPG server and the process of acquiring EPG information, but in the present embodiment, the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is responsible for these processes.
  • the network reservation recording application 2611 is responsible for setting the reservation recording of the program selected by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 in accordance with the request from the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • the application management unit 450, the integrated program guide generation application 2610, and the network reservation recording application 2611 have a relationship such as control or data reference with each software block constituting the control software 500, but other software may become complicated.
  • the relation line to the block is omitted.
  • FIG. 27 shows an example of an electronic program guide generated by the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • the same or corresponding parts as in FIG. 27 are identical or corresponding parts as in FIG.
  • an integrated EPG field 2701 is added to the electronic program guide of FIG.
  • the integrated EPG field 2701 presents the user with the types of available EPGs.
  • it is an electronic program guide which acquires and generates program information via terrestrial digital broadcast and BS digital broadcast as a "main body EPG" which is an electronic program guide of a broadcast system which the program information receiving apparatus 140 itself can receive.
  • An icon indicates to the user that a certain "net EPG” can be used.
  • Reference numeral 2702 denotes a net EPG icon indicating that "net EPG” can be used.
  • the electronic program guide to be displayed is selected by the user operating and instructing the operation device 230.
  • "main body EPG" may be described as "EPG".
  • FIG. 30 shows an example of the operating device 230.
  • Reference numeral 3001 denotes a program guide button for displaying an electronic program guide. If the program guide button 3001 is pressed during display, the electronic program guide is hidden.
  • 3002 is a determination button. It is used, for example, when deciding on a scheduled recording program.
  • 3003 is a back button. It is used to cancel the operation and return to the previous operation screen.
  • Reference numerals 3004, 3005, 3006, and 3007 denote cursor operation buttons used to move the cursor position on the operation screen.
  • 3004 is an upper button
  • 3005 is a lower button
  • 3006 is a left button
  • 3007 is a right button.
  • a date button 3008 is used to select the display date of the electronic program guide.
  • the display of the electronic program guide is switched on the previous day in the upper side ( ⁇ ) and the next day in the lower side ( ⁇ ).
  • Reference numeral 3009 denotes a page button for selecting a display time zone of the electronic program guide.
  • the display of the electronic program guide is switched to the previous time zone on the upper side ( ⁇ ) and the later time zone on the lower side ( ⁇ ).
  • a terrestrial digital button 3011 and a BS button 3012 are buttons for selecting a broadcasting system.
  • a net EPG button 3013 for selecting a net EPG is a button for selecting a net EPG.
  • the activation process is triggered by an activation request from the application management unit 450.
  • the application management unit 450 monitors pressing of the operation button of the operation device 230, and when it detects pressing of the program guide button 3001 or the net EPG button 3013, issues an activation request for the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • the start mode of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is set in accordance with the pressed button.
  • the start mode is set to "EPG mode”
  • the start mode is set to "net EPG mode”.
  • the “EPG mode” is a mode for displaying a “main body EPG” which is an electronic program guide of a broadcast system received by the program information receiving apparatus 140.
  • the “net EPG mode” is a mode for displaying “net EPG” which is an electronic program guide generated using the program information acquired from the program information transmission apparatus 110.
  • FIG. 28 shows the start processing flow of the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • S2801 Introduction The integrated program guide generation application 2610 searches for an EPG server on the home network.
  • the EPG server search is the same process as the EPG server search sequence described in FIG. By EPG server search, the number of EPG servers on the home network and EPG server information of each EPG server are acquired.
  • the electronic program guide to be generated is determined by the start mode and the number of EPG servers.
  • the start mode is "net EPG mode” and the number of EPG servers is one or more
  • the operation state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is transitioned to "net EPG generation” for generating a net EPG, and the start processing flow is ended. (S2803).
  • the operation state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is transited to “EPG generation” for generating the main body EPG, and the start processing flow is ended (S2804). That is, even when the net EPG button 3013 is pressed, the main body EPG is generated when there is no EPG server on the home network.
  • FIG. 29 is an EPG generation processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • the EPG generation processing flow is executed when the operation state is "EPG generation” or "net EPG generation”.
  • S2901 The integrated program guide generation application 2610 confirms its own operation state. In the case of "EPG generation”, the process branches to the process of S2902. In the case of "net EPG generation”, the process branches to the process of S2904.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 requests the program guide generation unit 410 to generate a program guide, and transitions to S2903.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 changes its operation state to "EPG display” for displaying the EPG, and ends the EPG generation processing flow.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 refers to the memory 213 and confirms the number of EPG servers.
  • the number of EPG servers is obtained by the activation process flow described above with reference to FIG. If the number of EPG servers> 1, ie, there are multiple EPG servers on the home network, the process proceeds to step S2905. In other cases, the process transitions to S2906.
  • S2905 A UI (User Interface) screen for presenting the name of the device of the EPG server and the like is displayed, and the user is allowed to select an EPG server for displaying the electronic program guide.
  • UI User Interface
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 requests the content directory controller 525 to acquire program information from the EPG server.
  • the content directory controller 525 acquires program information in the EPG information acquisition sequence shown in FIG. If there are a plurality of EPG servers on the home network, program information acquisition from the EPG server selected by the user is requested in S2906.
  • S2907 The integrated program guide generation application 2610 requests the acquired program guide generation unit 510 to generate a program guide, and the process transitions to S2908.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 changes its operation state to "NET EPG display” for displaying the net EPG, and ends the EPG generation processing flow.
  • FIG. 31 is an EPG display processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • the EPG display processing flow is executed when the operation state is "EPG display” or "net EPG display”.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 refers to the number of EPG servers stored in the memory 213 to determine the display state of the integrated EPG column 2701. If the number of EPG servers is 0, that is, there is no EPG server on the home network, the net EPG icon 2702 in the integrated EPG column 2701 is grayed out to indicate to the user that the net EPG can not be used (S3102). If the number of EPG servers is not 0, the net EPG icon 2702 is displayed to indicate to the user that the net EPG can be used (S3103).
  • S3104 Next, an electronic program guide to be displayed is determined according to the state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610. When the state is "EPG display”, the process transitions to S3105 to perform main body EPG display processing. If the state is "display of net EPG", the process transitions to step S3107 to perform net EPG display processing.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 displays the main body EPG generated by the program guide generation unit 410. At this time, the layer of the integrated EPG field 2701 is displayed as the upper layer rather than the layer of the main EPG.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 displays the net EPG generated by the acquired program guide generation unit 510. At this time, the layer of the integrated EPG field 2701 is displayed as the upper layer rather than the layer of the net EPG.
  • FIG. 32 shows an example of the state transition table of the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
  • the figure shows a state in which transition is made by an input from the operation device 230, that is, a button is pressed, when the state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is "during EPG display” or “during net EPG display”.
  • 3211 indicates a state in which the EPG is displayed
  • 3212 indicates a state in which the net EPG is displayed.
  • Reference numerals 3221, 3222, 22323, 3224, 3325, and 3226 denote push buttons of the operating device 230.
  • the slash (“/) means "OR".
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 hides the EPG being displayed, and ends the integrated program guide generation processing. .
  • the net EPG button is pressed (3222)
  • the state is transited to "net EPG generation”, and the EPG generation processing flow described in FIG. 29 is executed.
  • the terrestrial digital button or the BS button is pressed (3223)
  • the display of the EPG is switched as necessary. For example, if the BS button is pressed during the EPG display of the BS, the current EPG display is maintained.
  • the tuner unit 201 When the determination button is pressed (3224), when a program of the current time is selected, the tuner unit 201 is requested to select a channel, the displayed EPG is hidden, and the integrated program guide generation process is ended. Do. When a future program is selected, the reservation setting management unit 514 is requested to perform reservation processing.
  • the date button is pressed (3325)
  • the display date of the EPG display is switched to the previous day or the next day.
  • the page button is pressed (3326)
  • the display time zone of the EPG display is switched to the previous time zone or the next time zone.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2610 hides the EPG being displayed, and ends the integrated program guide generation processing. Do. Similarly, when the net EPG button is pressed (3222), the integrated program guide generation processing ends.
  • the terrestrial digital button or the BS button is pressed (3223)
  • the state is transited to "EPG generation”, and the EPG generation processing flow described in FIG. 29 is executed.
  • the network reservation recording application 2611 issues a recording reservation request for setting the reservation recording of the selected program to the EPG server currently displaying the net EPG.
  • the network reservation recording application 2611 executes setting of reservation recording of a program selected by the reservation recording sequence shown in FIG.
  • the date button is pressed (3325)
  • the page button is pressed (3326)
  • the date and time range to be displayed are specified and transition is made to "EPG generation", and the EPG generation processing described in FIG. 29 is performed. Execute the flow At this time, the range of date and time zone is specified in the program information acquisition request to the content directory controller 525 in S2906.
  • the date and time range may be set other than when display conditions such as when the date button or page button is pressed are specified. For example, when a condition is specified to acquire program information for a time that can be displayed on one screen of the electronic program guide, the amount of transmitted information decreases, so the time from the user request to the presentation of the net EPG display It has the effect of shortening.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 generates the “main body EPG” and the “net EPG” in a configuration that can be bi-directionally switched by the operation of the operation device 230. Therefore, the user can use “net EPG” without distinguishing it from “main EPG”.
  • the "net EPG” can provide an electronic program guide composed of the newest information as in the "main body EPG”.
  • the user is provided with means for selecting and presenting a scheduled program. Therefore, the user can set the scheduled recording on the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network in the same way as setting the scheduled recording on the device being operated.
  • FIG. 34 shows properties related to scheduled recording added to the property information of the EPG video program item shown in FIG.
  • the program information providing unit 426 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and confirms whether reservation recording is set for the program. For a program for which scheduled recording has been set, the value of catv: recordSchedule, which is a scheduled recording setting property, is set to "1", and the value of catv: recordSchedule @ id is set in the scheduled recording sequence (FIG. 21). The reservation ID (FIG. 24, 2420) is set.
  • FIG. 35 is an example of an electronic program guide generated by the acquired program guide generation unit 510 when the property related to scheduled recording is added.
  • parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG. 35 are the same as or correspond to those in FIG.
  • Reference numerals 3502 and 3501 denote an example of a scheduled recording icon indicating a program that has been scheduled and recorded.
  • the scheduled recording icon is displayed in each program column of the program for which the value of the catv: recordSchedule property is set to "1".
  • the state of scheduled recording can be displayed even when the net EPG acquired from the EPG server is displayed. The user can confirm the program which has been reserved and recorded by the operation of displaying the EPG, which is convenient.
  • FIG. 36 shows an example of each program column 2230 generated by the acquired program table generation unit 510 when the property related to scheduled recording is added.
  • an icon column 3601 is provided, and a reserved recording icon 3602 is arranged there.
  • the reserved recording icon 3602 since it is not necessary to change the reserved recording icon 3602 even if the height of each program column 2230 changes, there is an effect that the process of the acquired program guide generation unit 510 can be simplified.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 of the present embodiment also provides a scheduled recording setting property as program information.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 can display the scheduled recording setting state on the electronic program guide, and the usability for the user is improved.
  • the program information receiving apparatus performs a scheduled recording setting for recording the broadcast program to the recording apparatus to the program information transmitting apparatus using the program information acquired from the program information transmitting apparatus via the network.
  • the reservation video recording method via will be described.
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as a program information transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network.
  • the recorder 150 operates as a program information receiving apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” that acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information.
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 140 operates as a recording apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes a “recording server function” that acquires and records broadcast content via a network.
  • the configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the recording apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIG.
  • the configuration of the recorder 150 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
  • the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
  • the software configurations of the program information receiving apparatus 150 and the recording apparatus 140 are the same as the example shown in FIG.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 150 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 connected to the network, searches for the recording apparatus 140 connected to the network, and transmits the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to the recording apparatus 140 via the network.
  • a procedure for setting a scheduled recording for recording via a network will be described.
  • the procedure for the program information receiving apparatus 150 to search for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network is the same as that in FIG.
  • FIG. 38 shows an example of the procedure of the program information receiving apparatus 150 searching for the recording apparatus 140 on the network.
  • the search processing in the program information receiving apparatus 150 is executed as a recording server search sequence of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • the device detection unit 530 of the program information reception apparatus 150 provides a recording server function to search for a recording server on the network via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • Search for MediaServer (DMS) Send a "device search" message to all the devices that make up the home network.
  • the recording device 140 that has received the “device search” message processes the message with the device information service 424. Since the device type of the recording device 140 is MediaServer, the device information service 424 generates a message including a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) indicating the acquisition destination of its own device description information, and responds to the program information receiving device 150.
  • URI Uniform Resource Identifier
  • the device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving device 150 that has received the response accesses the URI included in the response message, and transmits a “device information request” message requesting device description information to the recording device 140.
  • the recording device 140 that has received the “device information request” message to the acquisition destination URI of the device description information processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, a message including the device description information shown in FIG. 6 is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 150 responds.
  • Device description information is described in the response message in a format such as XML.
  • FIG. 37 shows an example of the device description information of the recording device 150.
  • the device description information of the recording device 140 is the same as the example shown in FIG. “Av-upload” 3701 indicates providing an upload option function of receiving video and audio content via the network and recording the content on the recording and reproducing unit 210.
  • the device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving device 150 that has received the response interprets the response message, and the recording device 140 is a content directory service (ContentDirectoryService), a scheduled recording service (ScheduledRecordingService), an upload option function (av-upload) , Etc., and accesses the service description URL of each service, and transmits a “service information request” message requesting the detailed information of the service to the recording device 140.
  • ContentDirectoryService Content Directory Service
  • ScheduledRecordingService scheduled recording service
  • an upload option function av-upload
  • the recording device 110 that has received the “service information request” message to the function service description URL of the content directory service and the reservation recording service processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, as shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, a response message is generated with the detailed information of the service including the action list and the service status table, and the program information receiving device 150 is responded.
  • the device detection section 530 of the program information receiving apparatus 150 which has received the response passes the service detailed information of the content directory service to the content directory controller 525 and delivers the service detailed information of the reservation recording service to the reservation recording setting controller 529.
  • Each controller interprets service detail information and recognizes an action provided by each service.
  • the content directory controller 525 transmits a FeatureList action to confirm whether the content directory service of the recording device 140 provides an EPG according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
  • the recording device 140 that has received the FeatureList action processes the message in the content directory service 425. Then, the recording device 140 generates a message that returns the information content list information provided by the recording device 140 as shown in FIG. 9 with the content directory service 425, and responds to the program information receiving device 150. Since the content directory controller 525 that has received the response message includes “EPG” in the name attribute of ⁇ Feature> 931, 932 included in the ⁇ Features> tag 930, the EPG in which the recording device 140 provides program information is present. It recognizes that it is a server, and obtains an ID for acquiring an EPG from its ⁇ objectIDs> tag (931).
  • the network reservation recording application 501 stores recording server information such as the device description information of the recording server (recording device) 140 searched, detailed information of the service, and information content list information acquired by the FeatureList action by the network ID of the recording device 140 or the like. It is stored in the memory 213 in a format that can be referred to.
  • the sequence from S3812 to S3817 is performed for each recording device to acquire the recording server information of the recording server (recording device), and the memory Store in 213.
  • the number of recording servers found is also stored in the memory 213.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 150 searches the recording apparatus 140 according to the above procedure.
  • the execution timing of the search procedure may be when the program information receiving apparatus 150 is connected to the network or when the user requests a search for a recording server on the network. Regardless of the user's request, searching when connected to the network has the advantage of being able to present the search results without having to wait for the user when requested by the user.
  • the procedure for the program information receiving apparatus 150 to obtain EPG information from the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network is the same as that shown in FIG.
  • the procedure for setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is the same as that in FIG.
  • FIG. 41 shows an example of a request message of “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing EPG direct reservation recording.
  • the parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG. 41 are the same as or correspond to those in FIG. 41.
  • the ⁇ recordDestination> tag 4101 indicates the recording destination device name of scheduled recording.
  • the name of the device shown in FIG. 6 is specified by the character string specified by the ⁇ recordDestination> tag.
  • the recording quality is specified by the character string specified by the ⁇ desiredRecordQuality> tag 4102.
  • FIG. 42 shows an example of a request message of “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing standard reservation recording which is not EPG direct.
  • the parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG. 42 are the same as or correspond to those in FIG. 42.
  • the character string specified by the ⁇ recordDestination @ mediaType> tag 4201 specifies a recording destination in the case where the recording device 140 has a plurality of recording units.
  • the URL of the recording device 140 is specified by the character string specified by the ⁇ recordDestination @ targetURL> tag 4202.
  • the recording quality is specified by the character string specified by the ⁇ desiredRecordQuality @ type> tag 4203.
  • DEFAULT is set as the recording quality
  • recording is performed with the recording quality set by the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • FIG. 39 shows the procedure of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 performing upload recording on the recording apparatus 140 on the network.
  • the recording server 140 generates the recording ID and the URL in the content management unit according to the received recording object generation request, and with the result (Result), the program information on the network via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420
  • the transmitter 110 responds.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 having received the response transmits only the HTTP protocol Header to the URL contained in the response message via the media distribution service 423 and the network communication processing unit 420 to confirm the recording (POST ).
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the response transmits (POST) the HTTP protocol Body to the URL contained in the response message via the media distribution service 423 and the network communication processing unit 420 to perform recording. .
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 notifies the transmission end (POST End) of HTTP protocol Body transmission to the URL contained in the response message via the media distribution service 423 and the network communication processing unit 420 to end the scheduled recording. Do.
  • the recording device 140 that has received the POST End transmits a POST response (POST Response) of the HTTP protocol via the media reception controller 523 and the network communication processing unit 420 in order to notify that the recording has ended normally. .
  • FIG. 40 shows an example of the electronic program guide generated by the acquired program guide generator 510.
  • parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG. 40 are the same as or correspond to those in FIG. 40.
  • the reservation dialog 4000 includes reservation time information 4001, program information 4002, recording destination information 4003, recording mode information 4004, and the like.
  • the reservation time information 4001 displays date and time information of a program for which the user has specified a reservation. It is also possible for the user to change the time information.
  • the program information 4002 displays a channel and a program name.
  • the recording destination information 4003 displays UPnP-friendly friendly display of recordable devices, and the user can select which device to record.
  • the friendly rename is information for identifying a recordable device.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 150 make a recording reservation, and the program information receiving apparatus 150 performs a network recording. If it is a program that can be received by the DTV 150 itself, recording reservation is made to the program information receiving apparatus 150, and recording is performed by the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • a recording mode such as high definition image quality (HD) or standard image quality (XP) is displayed and can be changed by the user.
  • HD high definition image quality
  • XP standard image quality
  • the “information on program” selected in the reservation dialog 4000 is reflected in the reservation video recording object creation request, and the information is further reflected in the video recording object creation request.
  • the “information on program” mentioned here includes a program name 2413, an attribute id 2415 of the program, a recording destination device name 4101 and a recording quality 4102.
  • the “information on program” mentioned here can further include a recording destination 4201 and a URL 4202 of the recording device when the recording device has a plurality of recording units.
  • elements with numbers common to those in FIG. 25 are the same as in FIG.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the EPG information to other devices on the network, and uses the program information obtained from the EPG information to make a reservation recording in the program information transmitting apparatus 110. Provide an interface to configure.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 150 which is an EPG client-equipped device according to the present embodiment, searches for the program information transmitting device 110, which is an EPG server-equipped device connected to the network, acquires EPG information, and is connected to the network.
  • the recording device 140 which is a recording server-equipped device, is searched, and an electronic program guide screen is generated from the information and presented to the user. Then, the user is provided with means for selecting the presented program and performing scheduled recording. Therefore, the user can set scheduled recording for performing network recording on the recording device 140 in the program information transmitting device 110 via the network in the same way as setting scheduled recording for the device being operated.
  • the program information receiving apparatus operates the operation device 230 such as a user's remote control to acquire program information from the program information transmitting apparatus connected via the network, and property information of the program registered in the acquired EPG object
  • the program information is acquired and the program is recorded based on the above.
  • property information to be added to the property information described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15 in the first embodiment will be described, and processing using the added property information will be described.
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network.
  • the DTV with recording function 140 operates as the program information receiving apparatus 140 according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” which acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information.
  • the recorder 150 may be used as the program information receiving apparatus of the present embodiment.
  • the configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. Further, the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is also the same as the example shown in FIG. The software configuration of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 26 in the case of presenting a program guide, and is the same as the example shown in FIG. .
  • 43 (a) to 43 (g) show details of property information defined in each container and item.
  • the properties defined here are used for an EPG object which is program information in a network format.
  • the program information conversion unit 412 converts program information of a broadcast format used in digital broadcasting to generate program information of a network format.
  • the “upnp: seriesTitle” property shown in FIG. 43 (b) will be described.
  • the "upnp: seriesTitle” property is a title defined for a set of programs having the same property, for example, a program name of a drama series (referred to as AAAA).
  • AAAA a program name of a drama series
  • the property information is to be transmitted from the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to the program information receiving apparatus 140, the following is added to the program item 1834 shown in the XML document of FIG.
  • the processing sequence is as shown in FIG. 20 when the other party is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network. Description of each process is omitted since it is described above.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 receives the XML document shown in FIG. 18 in the above sequence, and acquires the information of the program item 1834. For example, if ⁇ upnp: seriesTitle> AAAAA ⁇ / upnp: seriesTitle> is present in the received XML document, it is known that the TV series is a drama of the program name "AAAAA".
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the user operates the program information receiving apparatus 140 with the operation device 230 and wants to display a series of program information of a drama named "AAAAA", the attribute "upnp: seriesTitle" is "AAAAA” in the received XML document
  • the program information having the EPG video item which is the above, is read out from the place (the recording / reproducing unit 210 or the memory 213 or the like) storing the program information
  • the TV series drama can be displayed collectively.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 is connected to the recording server via the network, the TV series drama of the program name "AAAAA" can be collectively scheduled for recording.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 is an EPG video program item whose property “upnp: seriesTitle” has “AAAAA”.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 may be requested to create a reserved recording object by the number.
  • To specify each program in each scheduled recording object set the attribute id of the read EPG video program item to the attribute "scheduledCDSObjectID" of each scheduled recording object to be created as shown in Figs. 24 and 41. Good.
  • the program title (dc: Title) of the read EPG video program item the program start time (ScheduledStartTime) It is also possible to set the length of time of the program (res @ duration) to the scheduled recording object.
  • "upnp: seriesTitle” can also be designated in a reservation recording object.
  • the program information stored in advance is stored as "AAAAA”, with “upnp: seriesTitle” being "AAAAA” as a search condition. It is also possible to read out the EPG video program items relating to "and create each scheduled recording object.
  • the “upnp: series ID” property shown in FIG. 43 (b) is obtained by giving a unique ID to the serial drama of the program name “AAAAA” introduced as an example above. As described above, batch acquisition of program information and batch recording reservation can be performed based on the unique ID. The procedure may be read as “upnp: seriesID” where “upnp: seriesTitle” is mentioned in the explanation of the above-mentioned procedure for batch acquisition of program information and batch recording reservation.
  • FIGS. 43 (c) to 43 (d) are for registering names of performers, producers, original authors, etc. of the program. For example, when ⁇ upnp: artist> BBBB ⁇ / upnp: artist> is added to the XML document shown in FIG. 18 using the upnp: artist property, the program information receiving apparatus 140 displays the program information of the performer "BBBB”. Acquisition and recording reservation can be performed. Moreover, it becomes possible to perform package acquisition and package recording reservation of program information in which "BBBB" has appeared based on performer "BBBB”. Moreover, package acquisition and program recording of program information by other properties are also possible.
  • the procedures of batch acquisition and batch recording may be replaced with “upnp: artist” and other properties in place of “upnp: seriesTitle” in the above description of the procedure of batch acquisition of program information.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 displays a dialog for accepting the designation of the program desired by the viewer from the program information acquired in a batch, and the viewer is selected from the programs displayed in the dialog box.
  • the recording reservation object creation request may be transmitted to the program information transmitting apparatus for the program selected in.
  • the reservation recording to be set is another reservation recording and The scheduled recording method in the case of duplication will be described.
  • the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the present embodiment, and has an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network.
  • the recorder 150 operates as the program information receiving apparatus 140 according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” that acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information.
  • the hardware configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIGS.
  • the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
  • the reservation management unit 414 receives a recording reservation designated by the reservation recording service 429, and detects the presence or absence of duplication of the reservation.
  • the reservation recording service 429 sets registration of reservation recording via the network in the reservation management unit 414 in addition to the functions described in the first embodiment, the reservation recording service 429 checks whether the reservation recording service 429 overlaps or not. If there is a duplication of reservation, the information indicating that the reservation is duplicated or the information of the overlapping reserved program acquired from the reservation management unit 414 is provided to the device that has transmitted the reservation recording request.
  • the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and hence the description is omitted.
  • the software configuration of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 connected to the network, and sets reservation recording (reservation recording 2) to the program information transmitting apparatus 110 with respect to the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network.
  • reservation recording reservation recording 2
  • FIG. 44 shows the procedure for setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 has a function of responding only when there is an overlap when making a reservation overlap response. It is a procedure.
  • the scheduled recording setting process in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network scheduled recording application 2611 as a scheduled recording sequence.
  • the reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation recording object creation request” message for setting reservation recording 1 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 1” in which information of a program to be reserved is described.
  • reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "reservation recording object creation request" message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and sets the program reservation in the reservation management unit 414 if there is no duplication of reservation.
  • the program information receiving device 140 returns a reservation ID 1 which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording 1 and a result which is information of a reservation result.
  • the scheduled recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “scheduled recording object creation request” message for setting the scheduled recording 2 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 2” in which information of a program to be reserved is described.
  • reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "reservation recording object creation request" message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and since the reservation recording 2 overlaps the reservation recording 1 and the reservation, the program reservation is not set in the reservation management unit 414, and the reservation is made to the program information receiving apparatus 140. Return duplicate responses.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 having received the response outputs a screen shown in FIG. 47 described later, and receives an instruction from the user via the operation signal receiving unit 226. If the user selects "END 4704", the scheduled recording setting process of FIG. 44 ends, and if the user selects "RECORDED LIST 4703", the process advances to step S4414.
  • the reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation list request” message for requesting a reservation list according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the “reservation list request” message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and returns a reservation list including the set reservation ID and reservation recording time to the program information receiving apparatus 140 as a response.
  • the reservation list includes information on each property shown in FIGS. 12, 13, 14, 15, and 43.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the reservation list response displays the screens shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 described later, and accepts an input of reservation recording to be deleted via the operation signal reception unit 226. In the screen shown in FIG. 49, when the user selects “cancel 4904”, the scheduled recording setting process of FIG. 44 is ended, and when the specific reserved recording described in the reservation list is selected, the screen shown in FIG. Is displayed.
  • FIG. 50 On the screen shown in FIG. 50, information of scheduled recording selected by the user on the screen of FIG. 49 is displayed.
  • the scheduled recording setting process of FIG. 44 is ended, and when “delete 5003” is selected, the process proceeds to S4416.
  • the reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 designates the reservation ID 1 of reservation recording 1 overlapping the selected reservation recording 2, and transmits a “reservation deletion request” message to the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "reservation deletion request" message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and deletes the reservation object of the designated reservation ID 1.
  • the deletion is executed, the response for which the reservation has been deleted is returned to the program information receiving apparatus 140.
  • the scheduled recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “scheduled recording object creation request” message for setting scheduled recording of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 2” in which information of a program to be reserved is described.
  • reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429. Also, referring to the reservation management unit 414, if there is no duplication of reservation, the program reservation is set in the reservation management unit 414. When the reservation is received, a reservation ID 2 which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording and a result which is information of the reservation result are returned.
  • the reservation information 1 overlapping with the reservation information 2 can be deleted and the reservation information 2 can be set.
  • FIG. 45 shows a procedure for setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 has a function of responding simultaneously with an overlapping reservation at the time of reservation overlapping response. is there.
  • the scheduled recording setting process in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network scheduled recording application 2611 as a scheduled recording sequence.
  • the reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation recording object creation request” message for setting reservation recording 1 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 1” in which information of a program to be reserved is described.
  • reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and sets the program reservation in the reservation management unit 414 if there is no duplication of reservation.
  • the program information receiving device 140 returns a reservation ID 1 which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording and a result which is information of a reservation result.
  • the reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation recording object creation request” message for setting reservation recording 2 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 2” in which information of a program to be reserved is described.
  • reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and sets a program reservation corresponding to the reservation information 2 in the reservation management unit 414 since the reservation recording 2 overlaps with the reservation recording 1 and the program information reception apparatus It returns a response in which the reservation is identical to reservation ID 2, which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording, to 140.
  • the reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “duplication reservation ID request” message for requesting a reservation ID of reservation recording overlapping with the reservation ID 2 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
  • the destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "duplicate reservation ID request" message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and returns a reservation ID 1 overlapping with the reservation ID 2 to the program information receiving apparatus 140 as a response.
  • the reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the duplicate reservation response specifies the reservation ID 1 and transmits a “reservation information request” message to the program information transmission apparatus 110.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation information request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and acquires reservation information including the program information of the designated reservation ID 1, the start and end times, and the like.
  • the reservation information of the acquired reservation ID 1 is returned to the program information receiving apparatus 140.
  • the reservation information includes information on each property shown in FIGS. 12, 13, 14, 15, and 43.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 having received the reservation list response displays a screen shown in FIG. 48 described later, and receives an input of whether or not to delete the reservation recording 1 via the operation signal receiving unit 226. In the screen shown in FIG. 48, when the user selects “cancel 5002”, the scheduled recording setting process of FIG.
  • S4518 The program information reception apparatus 140 designates the reservation ID 1 of the reservation recording 1 overlapping the reservation recording 2, and transmits a “reservation deletion request” message to the program information transmission apparatus 110.
  • the program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation deletion request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429.
  • the reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and deletes the reservation object of the designated reservation ID 1.
  • the deletion is executed, the response for which the reservation has been deleted is returned to the program information receiving apparatus 140.
  • the reservation information 1 overlapping with the reservation information 2 can be deleted and the reservation information 2 can be set.
  • FIG. 46 shows an example of the action list of the service detail information of the scheduled recording service 429.
  • FIG. 46 As shown in the figure, set an action name and an argument list for each action.
  • 4610, 4620, 4630, 4640, 4650 show each action.
  • the action name of action 4610 is 4611
  • the argument list is 4612.
  • the argument list enumerates the information of one or more arguments.
  • a column of 4691 indicates an argument name
  • a column of 4692 indicates an input / output direction (IN or OUT)
  • a column of 4693 indicates a type definition name.
  • CreateRecordSchedule 4611 is a scheduled recording object creation request.
  • Delete Record Scedule 4621 is a reservation deletion request.
  • GetRecordSchedule 4631 is a reservation information request for reservation recording specified by RecordScheduleID, which is a reservation ID.
  • GetScheduleConflicts 464 1 is a duplicate reservation ID request for acquiring a reservation ID overlapping with RecordScheduleID which is a reservation ID.
  • BrowseRecordSchedule4651 is a reservation list request.
  • FIG. 47 shows an example of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation duplication is received in S4413 of FIG.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2611 displays a reservation duplication dialog 4700.
  • 4701 is program information corresponding to the reservation information specified in S4412.
  • the program guide is returned to the program guide without setting the reservation, and when 4703 is designated, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 requests the reservation recording controller to obtain the reservation list to display the reservation list.
  • FIG. 48 is an example of a screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation information of the reservation ID for which the reservation overlap occurs in S4517 of FIG. 45 is received.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2611 displays a reservation duplication dialog 4700.
  • 4804 and 4805 are reservation recording information included in the reservation information 1 corresponding to the reservation ID 1 received in S4517.
  • the program guide is returned to, and when 4806 is specified, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 requests the reservation recording controller to acquire the reservation list in order to display the reservation list.
  • FIG. 49 shows an example of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation list is received in S4415 of FIG.
  • the reservation list 4900 duplication marks 4902 and 4903 indicating that reservations are duplicated are displayed in the information 4910 column together with information on reservation recording, and the user designates a reservation to be corrected by operating the remote control 230.
  • FIG. 50 shows an example of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 for displaying the scheduled recording to be deleted designated in FIG.
  • the reservation deletion dialog 5000 the reservation recording information 5001 to be deleted is displayed, and when the cancellation 5002 is specified, the deletion is not performed and the program returns to the reservation list, and when the deletion 5003 is specified, the reservation ID corresponding to the specified reservation recording information
  • the reservation deletion request S4416 is executed on the argument.
  • FIG. 51 is an example of a screen different from FIG. 48 of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation information of the reservation ID for which the reservation overlap occurs in S4517 of FIG. 45 is received.
  • the integrated program guide generation application 2611 displays a reservation duplication dialog 5100.
  • Reference numeral 5101 denotes reservation video recording information corresponding to the reservation ID 2 transmitted in S4512.
  • Reference numeral 5102 denotes reservation video recording information included in the reservation information 1 corresponding to the reservation ID 1 received in S4517.
  • the user When the user designates the cancel 5105 by operating the remote control 230, the user does not perform the reservation recording deletion, returns to the program schedule 3500 while the reservation is duplicated, selects the reservation recording to be deleted by selecting 5103 and 5104, and decides 5106 When is designated, the reservation recording controller 529 executes a reservation deletion request to delete the reservation ID 1.
  • FIG. 52 is a process flow of the program information receiving apparatus 140 in the case where the reservation duplication response of the procedure shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 includes and does not include duplication reservation.
  • S5201 A response to the reservation video recording object creation request is received at S4413 in FIG. 44 and 4513 in FIG.
  • S5202 Confirm duplication of reservation, and if there is no duplication, the process ends.
  • S5203 When the duplication of the reservation is detected in S5202, it is confirmed whether there is a reservation ID in the response.
  • S5204 If there is no reservation ID in S5203, the user confirms whether or not to display the reservation list, and if the user does not request the reservation list, the process ends.
  • S5205 When the user requests a reservation list in S5204, the reservation list request is transmitted.
  • S5206 The reservation list acquired as a response is displayed.
  • S5207 If there is a reservation ID in S5203, send a duplicate reservation request, acquire the reservation ID of the reservation recording overlapping the received reservation ID, send the reservation information request with the acquired reservation ID as an argument, and specify the specified reservation Get reservation information corresponding to the ID as a response.
  • S5208 Display the reservation information acquired as a response.
  • the program information receiving apparatus 140 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110, which is an EPG server mounted apparatus connected to the network, and acquires EPG information.
  • the recording device 140 which is a recording server-equipped device connected to the device, is searched, and an electronic program guide screen is generated from the information and presented to the user.
  • the user is provided with means for selecting the presented program and performing scheduled recording, and the user is provided with means for correcting the scheduled recording when the scheduled recording is duplicated. Therefore, the user can set scheduled recording for performing network recording on the recording device 140 in the program information transmitting device 110 via the network in the same way as setting scheduled recording for the device being operated.
  • the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, but includes various modifications.
  • the embodiments described above are described in detail in order to explain the present invention in an easy-to-understand manner, and are not necessarily limited to those having all the configurations described.
  • part of the configuration of one embodiment can be replaced with the configuration of another embodiment, and the configuration of another embodiment can be added to the configuration of one embodiment.
  • each of the configurations, functions, processing units, processing means, etc. described above may be realized by hardware, for example, by designing part or all of them with an integrated circuit. Further, each configuration, function, etc. described above may be realized by software by the processor interpreting and executing a program that realizes each function. Information such as a program, a table, and a file for realizing each function can be placed in a memory, a hard disk, a recording device such as an SSD (Solid State Drive), or a recording medium such as an IC card, an SD card, or a DVD.
  • SSD Solid State Drive
  • control lines and information lines indicate what is considered to be necessary for the description, and not all control lines and information lines in the product are necessarily shown. In practice, almost all configurations may be considered to be mutually connected.

Abstract

Provided is a program information transmission device that provides program information via a network. The program information transmission device receives a digital broadcast containing first program information that describes attributes regarding a program, and is characterized by the provision of: a program information processing unit that acquires the first program information from the digital broadcast signal; a device information provision unit that provides device description information describing commands for controlling the program information transmission device to other devices that are connected to the network; a program information conversion unit that uses the first program information acquired by the program information processing unit to generate an EPG object comprising the broadcast system, organization channel, and property information for a program; a program information provision unit that provides the generated EPG object as second program information in response to a first command sent from another device; and a programmed recording unit that carries out specified program recording settings in response to a second command sent from another device. The program information transmission device is additionally characterized in that the first and second commands contain property information for specifying a program, said information having been provided by another device.

Description

番組情報送信装置、番組情報受信装置および番組情報送信方法Program information transmitting apparatus, program information receiving apparatus, and program information transmitting method
 本発明は、デジタル放送受信装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a digital broadcast receiver.
 本技術分野の背景技術として、特表2007-510330公報(特許文献1)がある。この公報には、「複数のUpnP準拠リソース間の接続を確立することを可能にする方法が提供される。各リソースは、個別の接続マネージャサービスを持つ。その方法は、前もって決められた時間に確立される各リソース間の接続を交渉するのに、UpnP制御ポイントがその個別のサービスを使用することを可能にするよう、それぞれの接続マネージャサービスを設定することを有する。」と記載されている(要約参照)。 As a background art of this technical field, there is JP-A-2007-510330 (Patent Document 1). In this publication, a method is provided which allows to establish a connection between multiple UpnP compliant resources. Each resource has a separate connection manager service. The method is at a predetermined time. In order to negotiate the connection between each resource to be established, it comprises setting up the respective connection manager service to enable the UpnP control point to use its respective service. (See summary).
特表2007-510330公報Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-510330
 前記特許文献1にはスケジュールされた記録を可能にする方法が記載されている。しかし、特許文献1では、スケジュールされた記録の対象となるコンテンツの番組情報を提供する方法については記載されていない。そこで、本発明はネットワークを介して番組情報を提供する番組情報送信装置を提供する。 In said patent document a method is described which enables scheduled recording. However, Patent Document 1 does not describe a method for providing program information of content to be scheduled for recording. Therefore, the present invention provides a program information transmitting apparatus for providing program information via a network.
 上記課題を解決するために、例えば特許請求の範囲に記載の構成を採用する。 In order to solve the above problems, for example, the configuration described in the claims is adopted.
 本発明によれば、ネットワークを介して番組情報を提供する番組情報送信装置、または、ネットワークを介して番組情報を取得する番組情報受信装置を提供できる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a program information transmitting apparatus for providing program information through a network, or a program information receiving apparatus for acquiring program information through a network.
 上記した以外の課題、構成及び効果は、以下の実施形態の説明により明らかにされる。 Problems, configurations, and effects other than those described above will be apparent from the description of the embodiments below.
システムの構成例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a system. 番組情報送信装置の構成例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a program information transmitting device. 番組情報受信装置の構成例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a program information receiver. 番組情報送信装置のソフトウェア構成例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the software structural example of a program information transmitter. 番組情報受信装置のソフトウェア構成例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the software structural example of a program information receiver. 機器記述情報の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of apparatus description information. サービスの詳細情報のアクションリストの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the action list | wrist of the detailed information of a service. サービスの詳細情報のサービス状態テーブルの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the service status table of the detailed information of a service. FeatureListの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of FeatureList. EPG情報の構成例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structural example of EPG information. 「X_EPG_ChannelLineup」アクションの要求の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the request | requirement of "X_EPG_ChannelLineup" action. 「X_EPG_ChannelLineup」アクションの応答の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the response of "X_EPG_ChannelLineup" action. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ定義をXMLドキュメントで記述した例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example which described the property definition by the XML document. プロパティ定義をXMLドキュメントで記述した例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example which described the property definition by the XML document. 応答の引数ResultをXMLドキュメントで記述した例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the example which described the argument Result of a response with an XML document. EPGサーバ検索シーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of an EPG server search sequence. EPG情報取得シーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of an EPG information acquisition sequence. 予約録画シーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a reservation video recording sequence. 取得番組表生成部510が生成する電子番組表の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the electronic program guide which the acquisition program schedule production | generation part 510 produces | generates. ジャンル大分類値と記述内容の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a genre major classified value and the description content. 「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求と応答の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the request | requirement and response of a "reservation recording object creation request" action. 「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求と応答の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the request | requirement and response of a "reservation recording object creation request" action. 「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクション要求の入力引数の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the input argument of a "scheduled recording object creation request" action request. 番組情報受信装置の構成例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a program information receiver. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610が生成する電子番組表の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the electronic program guide which the integrated program schedule production | generation application 2610 produces | generates. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610の起動処理フローの一例を示す図である。FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a start processing flow of an integrated program guide generation application 2610. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610によるEPG生成処理フローの一例を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of an EPG generation processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610. 操作装置の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of an operating device. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610によるEPG表示処理フローの一例を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of an EPG display processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610の状態遷移テーブルの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition table of the integrated program schedule production | generation application 2610. FIG. 「X_EPG_Program」アクションの要求の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the request | requirement of "X_EPG_Program" action. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610が生成する電子番組表の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the electronic program guide which the integrated program schedule production | generation application 2610 produces | generates. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610が生成する電子番組表の各番組欄の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of each program column of the electronic program guide which the integrated program schedule production | generation application 2610 produces | generates. 機器記述情報の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of apparatus description information. 録画サーバ検索シーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a video recording server search sequence. 録画シーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a video recording sequence. 統合番組表生成アプリ2610が生成する電子番組表の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the electronic program guide which the integrated program schedule production | generation application 2610 produces | generates. 「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the request | requirement of "a reservation video recording object creation request" action. 「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the request | requirement of "a reservation video recording object creation request" action. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. プロパティ情報の定義の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the definition of property information. 予約録画シーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a reservation video recording sequence. 予約録画シーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a reservation video recording sequence. 予約録画サービスの詳細情報のアクションリストの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the action list | wrist of the detailed information of reservation video recording service. 統合番組表生成アプリが生成する予約録画確認画面の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation video recording confirmation screen which an integrated program schedule production | generation application produces | generates. 統合番組表生成アプリが生成する予約録画確認画面の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation video recording confirmation screen which an integrated program schedule production | generation application produces | generates. 統合番組表生成アプリが生成する予約一覧の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation list which an integrated program schedule production | generation application produces | generates. 統合番組表生成アプリが生成する予約削除確認画面の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation deletion confirmation screen which an integrated program schedule production | generation application produces | generates. 統合番組表生成アプリが生成する予約録画確認画面の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation video recording confirmation screen which an integrated program schedule production | generation application produces | generates. 統合番組表生成アプリによる表示処理フローの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the display processing flow by an integrated program schedule production | generation application.
 以下、実施例について図面を用いて説明する。なお、図面において、同一符号は、同一または相当部分を示す。また、本発明は、図示例に限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, examples will be described using the drawings. In the drawings, the same reference numerals indicate the same or corresponding parts. Further, the present invention is not limited to the illustrated example.
 本実施例は、番組情報送信装置からネットワークを介して取得した番組情報を用いて、番組情報受信装置が番組情報送信装置に対し、放送番組の予約録画設定を行うネットワーク経由の予約録画方式について説明する。 The present embodiment describes a reservation recording method via a network in which a program information receiving apparatus makes a program information transmitting apparatus a reservation recording setting of a broadcast program using program information acquired from a program information transmitting apparatus via a network. Do.
 図1は本実施例のシステム構成の例である。 FIG. 1 shows an example of the system configuration of this embodiment.
 1は放送を受信するユーザ宅、2および3は放送局、4は外部ネットワーク、5は放送局3が送出する放送を伝送する伝送路である。 Reference numeral 1 denotes a user's home for receiving broadcasts, 2 and 3 broadcast stations, 4 an external network, and 5 a transmission path for transmitting broadcasts transmitted by the broadcast station 3.
 本実施例において放送局2と放送局3は異なる放送方式で放送を送出する。ここでは放送局2は地上波を用いた地上デジタル放送を送出し、放送局3は伝送路3を介してデジタルケーブルテレビ(CATV)放送を送出する場合を例に説明する。なお、放送局2と放送局3の放送方式はそれぞれが異なる方式であれば良く、衛星波で送出されるBSデジタル放送とCATV放送などの組み合わせでも良い。 In the present embodiment, the broadcasting station 2 and the broadcasting station 3 transmit broadcasts by different broadcasting methods. Here, the case where the broadcasting station 2 transmits terrestrial digital broadcasting using terrestrial waves, and the broadcasting station 3 transmits digital cable television (CATV) broadcasting via the transmission path 3 will be described as an example. The broadcast systems of the broadcast station 2 and the broadcast station 3 may be different systems, and may be a combination of BS digital broadcast and CATV broadcast transmitted by satellite waves.
 ユーザ宅1、放送局2、放送局3は外部ネットワーク4に接続してもよい。外部ネットワーク4に接続した場合、放送局2、3は図示していないコンテンツサーバを用いて放送番組に関するコンテンツなどを提供できる。ユーザ宅1は外部ネットワーク4からコンテンツサーバに接続し、放送局2、3が提供するコンテンツを利用できる。 The user home 1, the broadcast station 2, and the broadcast station 3 may be connected to the external network 4. When connected to the external network 4, the broadcast stations 2 and 3 can provide content and the like related to a broadcast program using a content server (not shown). The user home 1 is connected to the content server from the external network 4 and can use the content provided by the broadcast stations 2 and 3.
 ユーザ宅1において、11は放送受信アンテナ、12および13は分配器、14はルータ、15はアクセスポイント、16はハブ、110および120は放送局3が送出するCATV放送を受信するデジタル放送受信装置、130、140、150は放送局2が送出する地上デジタル放送を受信するデジタル放送受信装置、160はモバイル機器である。20はユーザ宅1の部屋の境界線を示している。ここでは、境界線20の下がユーザ宅1の1階、上を2階とする。 In the user home 1, 11 is a broadcast receiving antenna, 12 and 13 are distributors, 14 is a router, 15 is an access point, 16 is a hub, and 110 and 120 are digital broadcast receiving apparatuses that receive CATV broadcasts transmitted by the broadcast station 3. 130, 140, and 150 are digital broadcast receiving apparatuses for receiving terrestrial digital broadcasts transmitted by the broadcast station 2, and 160 is a mobile device. Reference numeral 20 denotes a room border of the user home 1. Here, the lower side of the boundary line 20 is the first floor of the user house 1 and the upper side is the second floor.
 放送受信アンテナ11は放送局2が送出する地上デジタル放送を受信し、受信したデジタル放送は分配器12を介して地上デジタル放送を受信できるデジタル放送受信装置130、140、150に分配される。ここでは地上デジタル放送の受信装置として130はデジタルテレビ(DTV)、140は録画機能を備えたデジタルテレビ(録画機能付きDTV)、150はレコーダを例に示している。 The broadcast receiving antenna 11 receives the terrestrial digital broadcast transmitted by the broadcasting station 2, and the received digital broadcast is distributed to the digital broadcast receivers 130, 140, and 150 capable of receiving the terrestrial digital broadcast through the distributor 12. Here, as a receiver for terrestrial digital broadcasting, 130 is a digital television (DTV), 140 is a digital television (DTV with a recording function) having a recording function, and 150 is a recorder as an example.
 放送局3が送出するCATV放送は伝送路5を介してユーザ宅1に送出され、分配器13を介してCATV放送を受信できるデジタル放送受信装置110と120に分配される。ここではCATV放送の受信装置として110は録画機能を備えたセットトップボックス(録画機能付きSTB)、120はセットトップボックス(STB)を例に示している。録画機能付きSTB110とSTB120が受信したデジタル放送や録画機能付きSTB110が再生したコンテンツはDTV130に出力され表示される。 The CATV broadcasts sent from the broadcast station 3 are sent to the user home 1 via the transmission path 5 and distributed to the digital broadcast receivers 110 and 120 capable of receiving the CATV broadcasts via the distributor 13. Here, as a CATV broadcast receiver 110, a set top box (STB with a recording function) having a recording function is shown as an example and a set top box (STB) 120 is shown as an example. The digital broadcast received by the recording STB 110 and the STB 120 and the content reproduced by the recording STB 110 are output to the DTV 130 and displayed.
 ユーザ宅1のデジタル放送受信装置110、120、130、140、150はハブ16を介して相互に接続可能であり、ハブ16に接続された装置でユーザ宅1のホームネットワークを構築し、ルータ14を介して外部ネットワークにも接続できる。モバイル機器160はアクセスポイント15を介してハブ16に接続し、ホームネットワークを構成する装置となる。デジタル放送受信装置110、120、130、140、150はハブ16を介して相互に接続可能であり、ルータ14を介して外部ネットワークにも接続できる。 The digital broadcast receivers 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 of the user home 1 can be connected to each other via the hub 16, and devices connected to the hub 16 construct a home network of the user home 1, and the router 14 Can also connect to external networks via The mobile device 160 is connected to the hub 16 via the access point 15 and becomes a device configuring a home network. The digital broadcast receivers 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 can be connected to each other through the hub 16 and can also be connected to an external network through the router 14.
 なお、図1のシステムにおいて、デジタル放送受信装置110は本実施例に係る番組情報送信装置として動作し、ネットワークを介して放送の番組情報を提供する「EPGサーバ機能」を備える。デジタル放送受信装置140は本実施例に係る番組情報受信装置として動作し、ネットワークを介して番組情報を取得しユーザに提供する「EPGクライアント機能」を備える。以下、デジタル放送受信装置110を番組情報送信装置110と、デジタル放送受信装置140は番組情報受信装置140と表記する。 In the system of FIG. 1, the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as the program information transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network. The digital broadcast receiving apparatus 140 operates as a program information receiving apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” that acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information. Hereinafter, the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 is referred to as a program information transmitting apparatus 110, and the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 140 is referred to as a program information receiving apparatus 140.
 図2は本実施例に係る番組情報送信装置110の構成図例を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to this embodiment.
 番組情報送信装置110は、チューナ部201、復調復号部202、デマックス部203、音声デコード部205、映像デコード部206、データデコード部207、合成部208、ネットワーク接続部209、記録再生部210、制御211、メモリ213、入出力部214、操作I/F部215、限定受信I/F部216、限定受信情報記憶部217、アンテナ接続端子221、デジタル音声信号出力端子222、デジタル映像信号出力端子223、ネットワーク端子224、操作信号受信部226を有し、CATV放送を受信するデジタル放送受信装置である。 The program information transmitting apparatus 110 includes a tuner unit 201, a demodulation and decoding unit 202, a demax unit 203, an audio decoding unit 205, a video decoding unit 206, a data decoding unit 207, a synthesizing unit 208, a network connection unit 209, a recording and reproducing unit 210, and control. 211, memory 213, input / output unit 214, operation I / F unit 215, limited reception I / F unit 216, limited reception information storage unit 217, antenna connection terminal 221, digital audio signal output terminal 222, digital video signal output terminal 223 It is a digital broadcast receiving apparatus having a network terminal 224 and an operation signal receiving unit 226 and receiving CATV broadcasts.
 CATV放送は、アンテナ接続端子221からチューナ201に入力される。チューナ201は、受信すべきチャンネルのチャンネル周波数帯を抽出し、抽出したチャンネル周波数帯を直交復調によりベースバンド信号として復調復号部202に出力する。 The CATV broadcast is input to the tuner 201 from the antenna connection terminal 221. The tuner 201 extracts the channel frequency band of the channel to be received, and outputs the extracted channel frequency band to the demodulation and decoding unit 202 as a baseband signal by orthogonal demodulation.
 復調復号部202は、ベースバンド信号に対して、例えば8PSK(Phase Shift Keying)を用いた同期復調を行い、ビタビ復号やRS(リード・ソロモン)復号などの誤り訂正を施し、デジタル放送信号を復号してデマックス部203に出力する。 The demodulation and decoding unit 202 performs synchronous demodulation on the baseband signal using, for example, 8 PSK (Phase Shift Keying), performs error correction such as Viterbi decoding and RS (Reed Solomon) decoding, and decodes the digital broadcast signal. And output to the demax unit 203.
 ここでは、デジタル放送信号として、MPEG(Moving Picture Experts Groupe)方式によって圧縮符号化され、TS(Transport Stream)方式で多重化されたMPEG2-TSを扱う場合について説明する。 Here, a case will be described where, as a digital broadcast signal, an MPEG2-TS compressed and encoded by the Moving Picture Experts Groupe (MPEG) method and multiplexed by the TS (Transport Stream) method is handled.
 デマックス部203は、多重化されたMPEG2-TSから後段で使われる音声信号、映像信号、字幕やデータ放送信号を分離・抽出する。そして、限定受信I/F部217を介して限定受信情報記憶部217に保持されている鍵情報などを取得し、この情報を用いて著作権保護のためにMPEG2-TSにかけられているスクランブルを解除し、放送番組などコンテンツを構成する映像信号や音声信号や字幕の信号ストリームであるPES(Packetized Elementary Stream)あるいはES(Elementary Stream)やデータ放送などのデータを出力する。 The demux unit 203 separates and extracts an audio signal, a video signal, a subtitle and a data broadcast signal to be used in the subsequent stage from the multiplexed MPEG2-TS. Then, the key information etc. stored in the limited reception information storage unit 217 is acquired via the limited reception I / F unit 217, and using this information, the scramble applied to the MPEG2-TS for copyright protection is performed. It cancels and outputs data such as PES (Packetized Elementary Stream) or ES (Elementary Stream) which is a signal stream of video signals and audio signals and subtitles constituting contents such as a broadcast program, and data broadcasting.
 音声デコード部205はデマックス部203で分離・抽出された音声信号のPESあるいはESをデコードし、デジタル音声信号出力端子222に出力する。映像デコード部206はデマックス部203で分離・抽出された映像信号のPESあるいはESをデコードし、合成部208に出力する。データデコード部207はデマックス部203で分離・抽出された字幕やデータ放送信号をデコードし、合成部208に出力する。合成部208は映像デコード部206、データデコード部207から入力された信号を合成して表示画面を構成し、デジタル映像信号出力端子223へ出力する。 The audio decoding unit 205 decodes the PES or ES of the audio signal separated and extracted by the demax unit 203 and outputs the decoded signal to the digital audio signal output terminal 222. The video decoding unit 206 decodes the PES or ES of the video signal separated and extracted by the demax unit 203 and outputs the decoded signal to the combining unit 208. The data decoding unit 207 decodes the subtitles and data broadcast signals separated and extracted by the demux unit 203 and outputs the subtitles and the data broadcast signal to the combining unit 208. The synthesizing unit 208 synthesizes the signals input from the video decoding unit 206 and the data decoding unit 207 to construct a display screen, and outputs the display screen to the digital video signal output terminal 223.
 ネットワーク接続部209は通信処理部と伝送コンテンツ保護部を備えネットワーク端子224を介してハブ16に接続された他の機器やネットワーク3に接続された宅外のサーバなどとデータやコンテンツの送受信を行う。通信処理部は通信プロトコルの解釈や、通信データのフロー制御をおこなう。伝送コンテンツ保護部は、コンテンツに課された著作権保護に応じて機器認証処理を行ったり、ネットワークへ出力するコンテンツの暗号処理や、ネットワークから受信したコンテンツの復号処理を施す。 The network connection unit 209 includes a communication processing unit and a transmission content protection unit, and transmits / receives data and content to / from other devices connected to the hub 16 via the network terminal 224 or a remote server etc. connected to the network 3. . The communication processing unit interprets the communication protocol and controls the flow of communication data. The transmission content protection unit performs device authentication processing according to the copyright protection imposed on the content, performs encryption processing of the content to be output to the network, and performs decryption processing of the content received from the network.
 記録再生部210は記録媒体と暗号・復号処理部を備え、受信した放送番組などのコンテンツやネットワークを介して取得したコンテンツを記録媒体に書き込む記録処理、および、記録したコンテンツを記録媒体から読み出し出力する再生処理、記録したコンテンツの削除処理などを担う。また、コンテンツを記録媒体に記録する際には暗号・復号処理部で適切な暗号化処理を施し、コンテンツを記録媒体から読み出す場合は、記録時に施された暗号を復号して出力する。なお記録媒体は、ハードディスクのような取り外せない記録媒体、もしくは光ディスク、リムーバブルハードディスク、メモリカードのような取り外し可能な記録媒体のどちらか、もしく両方を備える。また、ハードディスクと光ディスクとメモリカードなどのように数種類の記録媒体を備えても良い。 The recording / playback unit 210 includes a recording medium and an encryption / decryption processing unit, records the received content such as a broadcast program or the content acquired via a network into the recording medium, and reads and outputs the recorded content from the recording medium Responsible for playback processing, deletion processing of recorded content, and the like. When the content is recorded on the recording medium, the encryption / decryption processing unit performs appropriate encryption processing, and when the content is read from the recording medium, the encryption applied at the time of recording is decrypted and output. The recording medium includes either or both of a non-removable recording medium such as a hard disk, or a removable recording medium such as an optical disk, a removable hard disk, and a memory card. In addition, several types of recording media such as a hard disk, an optical disk, and a memory card may be provided.
 制御部211はOS(Operating System)やアプリケーションの実行処理を行い、番組情報送信装置110を機能させる。 The control unit 211 executes an operating system (OS) and an application, and causes the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to function.
 メモリ213は揮発性メモリおよび不揮発性メモリで構成する。不揮発性メモリにはOSやアプリケーションなどの番組情報送信装置110を動作させるためのソフトウェアを格納する。揮発性メモリにはソフトウェアの動作に必要なデータなどを一時的に格納する。 The memory 213 is composed of volatile memory and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory stores software for operating the program information transmitting apparatus 110 such as an OS or an application. Volatile memory temporarily stores data necessary for software operation.
 操作I/F部215は、操作信号受信部226を介して操作装置230からの入力信号を受信し、制御部211へ出力する。操作装置230は、例えばリモコンやマウス、キーボード、タッチパネルなどである。操作信号受信部226は赤外線などを用いて無線で操作装置230からの入力信号を受信しても良いし、接続端子を介して操作装置230を有線接続し、入力信号を受信しても良い。 The operation I / F unit 215 receives an input signal from the operation device 230 via the operation signal reception unit 226, and outputs the signal to the control unit 211. The operating device 230 is, for example, a remote control, a mouse, a keyboard, a touch panel, or the like. The operation signal reception unit 226 may wirelessly receive an input signal from the operation device 230 using infrared rays or the like, or may wire the operation device 230 via a connection terminal and receive the input signal.
 システムバス227は番組情報送信装置110の構成要素に接続されるデータバスである。各構成要素の間で、制御信号やデータ信号の通信に使用される。 A system bus 227 is a data bus connected to the components of the program information transmitter 110. It is used for communication of control signals and data signals between each component.
 限定受信I/F部216は限定受信情報記憶部217を接続するインターフェースである。限定受信情報記憶部217はスクランブルを解除するための鍵情報などを保持する。 The conditional access I / F unit 216 is an interface for connecting the conditional access information storage unit 217. The limited reception information storage unit 217 holds key information and the like for descrambling.
 デジタル音声信号出力端子222、デジタル映像信号出力端子223は番組情報送信装置110が受信した放送番組や記録した放送番組等のコンテンツを視聴するために、外付けのテレビなどに非圧縮のデジタル音声信号、デジタル映像信号を出力する出力端子である。デジタル音声信号出力端子222、デジタル映像信号出力端子223は物理的に分離されたコネクタから出力されても良いし、複数の出力端子を備えるコネクタを用いて1つのコネクタから出力されるように実装しても良い。また、コネクタに制御信号出力端子を割り当て、ディスプレイなど外部接続された表示機器を制御するための表示機器制御信号を出力しても良い。 A digital audio signal output terminal 222 and a digital video signal output terminal 223 are digital audio signals uncompressed on an external television or the like to view contents such as a broadcast program received by the program information transmission apparatus 110 or a broadcast program recorded. , And an output terminal for outputting a digital video signal. The digital audio signal output terminal 222 and the digital video signal output terminal 223 may be output from physically separated connectors, or may be implemented to be output from one connector using a connector having a plurality of output terminals. It is good. Further, a control signal output terminal may be assigned to the connector, and a display device control signal for controlling a display device externally connected such as a display may be output.
 図3は本実施例に係る番組情報受信装置140の構成図例を示すブロック図である。図3において図2と同一または相当部分は同一符号で示し、説明を省略する。 FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a program information receiving apparatus 140 according to this embodiment. In FIG. 3, the same or corresponding parts as those in FIG. 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
 番組情報受信装置140は番組情報送信装置110の構成に加え、音声出力部301、映像表示部302、音声入力切替部303、映像入力切替部304、デジタル音声信号入力端子305、デジタル映像信号入力端子306を備える。 The program information receiving apparatus 140 has an audio output unit 301, a video display unit 302, an audio input switching unit 303, a video input switching unit 304, a digital audio signal input terminal 305, and a digital video signal input terminal in addition to the configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110. 306 is provided.
 音声デコード部205でデコードされた音声信号はデジタル音声信号出力端子222と音声入力切替部303に出力される。 The audio signal decoded by the audio decoding unit 205 is output to the digital audio signal output terminal 222 and the audio input switching unit 303.
 合成部306から出力される映像信号はデジタル映像信号出力端子223と映像入力切替部304に出力される。 The video signal output from the combining unit 306 is output to the digital video signal output terminal 223 and the video input switching unit 304.
 デジタル音声信号入力端子305、デジタル映像信号入力端子306は外部からの音声信号、映像信号を入力する端子である。入力された信号は音声入力切替部303、映像入力切替部304を介して音声出力部301、映像表示部302へ出力される。 A digital audio signal input terminal 305 and a digital video signal input terminal 306 are terminals for inputting an external audio signal and video signal. The input signal is output to the audio output unit 301 and the video display unit 302 via the audio input switching unit 303 and the video input switching unit 304.
 音声入力切替部303と映像入力切替部304は、音声出力部310や映像表示部302に、外部から入力された信号を出力するか、内部で生成した信号を出力するかの切り替えは、制御部211によって制御される。 The audio input switching unit 303 and the video input switching unit 304 control whether the signal input from the outside is output or the signal generated internally is output to the audio output unit 310 or the video display unit 302. It is controlled by 211.
 なお、デジタル音声信号出力端子222、デジタル映像信号出力端子223は物理的に分離されたコネクタから出力されても良いし、複数の出力端子を備えるコネクタを用いて1つのコネクタから出力されるように実装しても良い。また、コネクタに制御信号出力端子を割り当て、ディスプレイなど外部接続された表示機器を制御するための表示機器制御信号を出力しても良い。 The digital audio signal output terminal 222 and the digital video signal output terminal 223 may be output from physically separated connectors, or may be output from one connector using a connector having a plurality of output terminals. It may be implemented. Further, a control signal output terminal may be assigned to the connector, and a display device control signal for controlling a display device externally connected such as a display may be output.
 また、デジタル音声信号入力端子305、デジタル映像信号入力端子306も物理的に分離されたコネクタから出力されても良いし、複数の出力端子を備えるコネクタを用いて1つのコネクタから出力されるように実装しても良い。また、コネクタに制御信号入力端子を割り当て、番組情報受信装置140を表示機器として制御させるための表示機器制御信号が入力されても良い。制御部211は、入力された制御信号に基づき、著作権保護ののための暗号を復号したり、入力された映像信号の階調数を判断したり、2D映像か3D(立体)映像かを判断したりし、それによって、出力する表示及び音声を制御する。 Also, the digital audio signal input terminal 305 and the digital video signal input terminal 306 may be output from the physically separated connector, or may be output from one connector using a connector provided with a plurality of output terminals. It may be implemented. In addition, a control signal input terminal may be assigned to the connector, and a display device control signal for controlling the program information receiving device 140 as a display device may be input. The control unit 211 decrypts the encryption for copyright protection, determines the number of gradations of the input video signal, and determines whether it is 2D video or 3D (stereoscopic) video based on the input control signal. It determines and thereby controls the display and sound to be output.
 図4は図2に示した番組情報送信装置110のソフトウェア構成例を示す図である。 FIG. 4 is a view showing an example of the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 shown in FIG.
 番組情報送信装置110の機能を実現する制御ソフトウェア400は番組情報送信装置110のメモリ213に展開され制御部211で実行される。 Control software 400 for realizing the function of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is expanded in the memory 213 of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and executed by the control unit 211.
 制御ソフトウェア400は番組表生成部410、番組情報処理部411、番組情報変換部412、コンテンツ管理部413、予約管理部414、ネットワーク通信処理部420、メッセージ解析部421、メッセージ生成部422、メディア配信サービス423、機器情報サービス424、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425、番組情報提供部426、コンテンツ情報提供部427、ストリーミング接続サービス428、予約録画サービス429、アプリ管理部450で構成される。 The control software 400 includes a program guide generation unit 410, a program information processing unit 411, a program information conversion unit 412, a content management unit 413, a reservation management unit 414, a network communication processing unit 420, a message analysis unit 421, a message generation unit 422, and media distribution. A service 423, a device information service 424, a content directory service 425, a program information providing unit 426, a content information providing unit 427, a streaming connection service 428, a reservation recording service 429, and an application management unit 450.
 なお、アプリ管理部450は制御ソフトウェア400を構成するほとんど全てのソフトウェアブロックと制御やデータ参照などの関係を持つが、図が煩雑になるため他のソフトウェアブロックに対する関係線は省略する。 Although the application management unit 450 has a relationship such as control or data reference with almost all software blocks constituting the control software 400, the relationship lines with other software blocks are omitted because the figure becomes complicated.
 番組表生成部410は、番組情報処理部411を参照して取得した放送番組の情報を用いてユーザが放送予定の番組の情報を閲覧したり、所望の番組を選択して選局、あるいは所望の番組の録画や視聴の予約を可能にするユーザインターフェース(UI)を提供する電子番組表を生成する。 The program guide generation unit 410 browses information on a program scheduled to be broadcast by the user using information on a broadcast program acquired with reference to the program information processing unit 411, selects a desired program, and selects a desired station. An electronic program guide is provided that provides a user interface (UI) that enables recording of programs and reservation of viewing.
 番組情報処理部411は、デマックス部203により分離・抽出された放送番組の情報を含むPESあるいはESから、放送スケジュール、番組タイトルなどの番組情報を取得して番組情報テーブルを構成し、メモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。 The program information processing unit 411 acquires program information such as a broadcast schedule and a program title from PES or ES including information on broadcast programs separated / extracted by the demax unit 203, and forms a program information table, Recording is performed in the recording / reproducing unit 210.
 番組情報処理部411は、受信装置が受信できる放送局の番組情報を取得する。そして、取得した番組情報の変更や新しい番組情報を取得した場合には、その都度、番組情報テーブルを更新する。番組情報は、例えば、MPEG-TSの番組特定情報(PSI:Program Specific Information)、あるいは、番組配列情報(SI:Service Information)に挿入されるものである。 The program information processing unit 411 acquires program information of a broadcasting station that can be received by the receiving device. Then, each time the acquired program information is changed or new program information is acquired, the program information table is updated. The program information is inserted into, for example, program specific information (PSI: Program Specific Information) of MPEG-TS or program sequence information (SI: Service Information).
 番組情報変換部412は、番組情報をデジタル放送で用いられる書式(以下、放送書式と表現する)から、ネットワーク送出で用いられる書式(以下、ネットワーク書式と表現する)に変換してネットワーク書式番組表データをメモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。ネットワーク書式番組表データは番組情報テーブルの更新に同期して更新される。また、番組情報変換部412は、番組情報サービス426の問い合わせに対し、照会条件を満たす番組情報を抽出し、ネットワーク書式で番組情報を出力する。 The program information conversion unit 412 converts program information from a format used in digital broadcasting (hereinafter referred to as a broadcast format) into a format used in network transmission (hereinafter referred to as a network format) to obtain a network format program guide The data is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording and reproducing unit 210. The network format program guide data is updated in synchronization with the update of the program information table. Further, in response to the inquiry of the program information service 426, the program information conversion unit 412 extracts program information satisfying the query condition, and outputs the program information in a network format.
 コンテンツ管理部413は、記録再生部210にコンテンツを記録する際に、そのコンテンツのコンテンツ情報を生成し、メモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。コンテンツ情報とは、例えば、コンテンツを一意に定める識別子(コンテンツID)、ファイル名、サイズ、コンテンツの種類、データフォーマット、記録日時や、タイトル名、ジャンル、コピー制御情報、などの番組情報である。ここで、コンテンツの種類とは映像、音声、画像などを示し、データフォーマットとはMPEG(Moving Picture Experts Group)やMP3(MPEG Audio Layer‐3)などコンテンツの符号化方式を示す。コンテンツ情報は、記録するコンテンツが放送番組の場合は番組情報処理部411から取得し、ネットワークを介して取得したコンテンツの場合はコンテンツの送信元から取得する。また、コンテンツとコンテンツ情報の対応付けや、コンテンツが削除されたり移動した場合のコンテンツ情報の更新、コピー回数に制限があるコンテンツについてのコピー回数の管理などを行う。また、コンテンツ情報を基に記録したコンテンツの一覧を提示するUIを生成しユーザに提示する。更に、ユーザの指示により、ユーザが選択したコンテンツを再生したり、コピーや移動の処理を行う。 When the content management unit 413 records content in the recording and reproduction unit 210, the content management unit 413 generates content information of the content and records the content information in the memory 213 or the recording and reproduction unit 210. The content information is, for example, program information such as an identifier (content ID) that uniquely defines the content, file name, size, type of content, data format, recording date and time, title name, genre, copy control information, and the like. Here, the type of content indicates video, audio, image or the like, and the data format indicates a coding method of content such as MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) or MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3). The content information is acquired from the program information processing unit 411 when the content to be recorded is a broadcast program, and acquired from the transmission source of the content in the case of the content acquired through the network. In addition, association of content and content information, update of content information when content is deleted or moved, management of the number of copies for content with a limited number of copies, and the like are performed. Also, a UI for presenting a list of contents recorded based on the content information is generated and presented to the user. Furthermore, in accordance with the instruction of the user, the content selected by the user is reproduced, and processing of copying and moving is performed.
 予約管理部414は、ユーザが電子番組表などを操作して設定する録画および視聴の予約や、予約録画サービス429から指定される録画の予約を受け付け、予約情報を管理する。予約情報はメモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。また、予約された番組の開始時刻を監視し、チャンネル部201で受信するチャンネルを適切に設定したり、録画予約の場合は、放送番組などコンテンツを構成するストリームがデマックス部203から記録再生部210に出力されるように設定するなど、予約を実行するときの設定処理も行う。 The reservation management unit 414 receives recording reservation and viewing reservation set by the user operating the electronic program guide and the like, and recording reservation specified by the reservation recording service 429, and manages reservation information. The reservation information is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210. In addition, the start time of the reserved program is monitored, and the channel to be received by the channel unit 201 is appropriately set, or in the case of a recording reservation, a stream constituting a content such as a broadcast program is recorded from the demax unit 203 to the recording / reproducing unit 210 It also performs setting processing when executing reservation, such as setting to output to.
 ネットワーク通信処理部420は、ネットワークで接続された他の機器との間でコンテンツや制御メッセージを送受信する際に通信プロトコルに従って通信データの処理を行う。 The network communication processing unit 420 processes communication data in accordance with a communication protocol when transmitting and receiving content and control messages with other devices connected via a network.
 メッセージ解析部421は、ネットワーク上の機器の間で送受信される所定の形式に従って生成された制御要求などのメッセージを解釈し、要求された制御を処理するサービスに振り分ける。 The message analysis unit 421 interprets a message such as a control request generated according to a predetermined format transmitted and received between devices on the network, and distributes the requested control to a service that processes the control.
 サービスとは、機器が他の機器に対して提供する機能であり、他の機器はネットワークを介して遠隔操作で機器が提供するサービスを利用できる。図4では、メディア配信サービス423、機器情報サービス424、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425、ストリーミング接続サービス428、予約録画サービス429がこれに相当する。 The service is a function provided by the device to another device, and the other device can use a service provided by the device by remote control via the network. In FIG. 4, the media distribution service 423, the device information service 424, the content directory service 425, the streaming connection service 428, and the reservation recording service 429 correspond to this.
 メッセージ生成部422は、各種サービスが出力する、他の機器からの制御要求に対する応答や、他の機器に対しての制御要求を、ネットワーク上の機器の間で用いられる所定の形式に従ったメッセージで生成する。生成したメッセージは、例えば図11(a)、図11(b)のような形式で作成され、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介して適切な通信プロトコルで他の機器に送信される。 The message generation unit 422 is a message according to a predetermined format used among devices on the network, which is a response to a control request from another device or a control request for another device, which is output by various services. Generate with The generated message is created, for example, in a format as shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B, and is transmitted to another device by an appropriate communication protocol via the network communication processing unit 420.
 メディア配信サービス423は、指定されたコンテンツを、ホームネットワーク、あるいは、公衆ネットワーク網4を介して他の機器に送出するサービスを提供する。メディア配信サービス423は、他の機器からの要求に従って、番組情報送信装置110が受信した放送番組や記録再生部210に記録した放送番組などのコンテンツを、ネットワーク通信処理部420に出力する。また、ネットワークを介して、配信の開始や停止、一時停止、スキップなどコンテンツの配信を制御するためのインターフェースを提供する。また、対応する転送プロトコルの情報をメモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。転送プロトコルとはHTTP GETやRTP(Real‐time Transport Protocol)などの事である。 The media distribution service 423 provides a service of transmitting designated content to another device via the home network or the public network 4. The media distribution service 423 outputs contents such as a broadcast program received by the program information transmission apparatus 110 and a broadcast program recorded in the recording / reproducing unit 210 to the network communication processing unit 420 according to a request from another device. It also provides an interface for controlling the delivery of content, such as start / stop, pause, and skip of delivery via a network. Also, information on the corresponding transfer protocol is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210. The transfer protocol is such as HTTP GET and Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP).
 機器情報サービス424は、自身の機器について記述した機器記述情報や、自身の機器が提供するサービスの詳細について記述したサービス詳細情報などを他の機器に提供する。また、自身の機器がネットワークへ接続したり、ネットワークから離脱するときにホームネットワーク上に通知したり、他の機器からのデバイス検索に対して応答を行う。機器記述情報およびサービス詳細情報については後で説明する。 The device information service 424 provides the other device with device description information describing its own device, and service detailed information describing details of the service provided by the own device. Also, it notifies the home network when its own device connects to the network, leaves the network, and responds to device searches from other devices. Device description information and service detail information will be described later.
 コンテンツディレクトリサービス425は、番組情報送信装置110が他の機器に提供できる全てのコンテンツに関して、コンテンツのタイトル、ジャンルなどのメタデータ情報を提供する。コンテンツディレクトリサービス425は記録再生部210に記録されたコンテンツに関してはコンテンツ情報提供部427から、放送のEPG情報に関しては番組情報提供部426からメタデータ情報を収集する。 The content directory service 425 provides metadata information such as content titles and genres for all the content that the program information transmitting apparatus 110 can provide to other devices. The content directory service 425 collects metadata information from the content information providing unit 427 for the content recorded in the recording and reproducing unit 210 and from the program information providing unit 426 for the EPG information of the broadcast.
 番組情報提供部426は、番組情報変換部412を参照して、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425からの要求に従って、編成チャンネルの一覧情報や指定されたチャンネルの番組一覧情報、各番組の情報などを提供する。 The program information providing unit 426 refers to the program information conversion unit 412 and provides list information of organized channels, program list information of designated channels, information of each program, and the like according to a request from the content directory service 425.
 コンテンツ情報提供部427は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425からの要求に従って、コンテンツ管理部413が作成したコンテンツ情報を参照し、録画番組の一覧情報や、指定された録画番組の詳細情報などを提供する。 The content information provision unit 427 refers to the content information created by the content management unit 413 according to the request from the content directory service 425, and provides list information of recorded programs, detailed information of a designated recorded program, and the like.
 ストリーミング接続サービス428は、配信サービス423が対応する転送プロトコルやコンテンツの種類、データフォーマットの情報を提供する。転送プロトコルはメディア配信サービス423から取得し、コンテンツの種類やデータフォーマットはコンテンツ管理部413が作成したコンテンツ情報を参照して取得する。 The streaming connection service 428 provides information on transfer protocols, content types, and data formats that the distribution service 423 supports. The transfer protocol is acquired from the media distribution service 423, and the type and data format of the content are acquired with reference to the content information created by the content management unit 413.
 予約録画サービス429は、ネットワークを介した予約録画の登録や削除を予約管理部414に設定したり、予約されている録画の一覧情報などを予約管理部414から取得して提供する。 The reservation recording service 429 sets registration and deletion of reservation recording via the network in the reservation management unit 414, and acquires and provides list information of recordings reserved and the like from the reservation management unit 414.
 アプリ管理部450は、番組情報受信装置140で動作する各ソフトウェアの動作を管理するものである。アプリ管理部450は、操作装置230から所定の操作ボタンの押下を示す信号の入力を受けた場合に所定のアプリを起動するなどのような制御を行う。 The application management unit 450 manages the operation of each software operating in the program information receiving apparatus 140. The application management unit 450 performs control such as activating a predetermined application when receiving an input of a signal indicating pressing of a predetermined operation button from the operation device 230.
 図5は、図3に示した番組情報受信装置140のソフトウェア構成図である。
 番組情報受信装置140の機能を実現する制御ソフトウェア500は番組情報受信装置140のメモリ213に展開され制御部211で実行される。
FIG. 5 is a software block diagram of the program information receiver 140 shown in FIG.
Control software 500 for realizing the function of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is expanded in the memory 213 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 and executed by the control unit 211.
 制御ソフトウェア500は番組表生成部410、番組情報処理部411、コンテンツ管理部413、ネットワーク通信処理部420、メッセージ解析部421、メッセージ生成部422、機器情報サービス424、ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501、取得番組表生成部510、予約設定管理部514、メディア受信コントローラ523、コンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525、番組情報取得部526、コンテンツ情報取得部527、ストリーミング接続コントローラ528、予約録画設定コントローラ529、機器検出部530、アプリ管理部450で構成する。 The control software 500 includes a program guide generation unit 410, a program information processing unit 411, a content management unit 413, a network communication processing unit 420, a message analysis unit 421, a message generation unit 422, a device information service 424, a network reservation recording application 501, and an acquired program. Table generation unit 510, reservation setting management unit 514, media reception controller 523, content directory controller 525, program information acquisition unit 526, content information acquisition unit 527, streaming connection controller 528, reservation recording setting controller 529, device detection unit 530, application The management unit 450 is configured.
 図中、図4と同一の符号は、同一または相当部分を示すため、説明は割愛する。 In the figure, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 4 denote the same or corresponding parts, and therefore the description will be omitted.
 ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501は、ホームネットワーク上の他の機器へ録画予約を行うネットワーク経由の予約録画機能をユーザに提供するアプリケーションである。ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501は機器検出部530やコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525、予約録画設定コントローラ529などを制御して、ホームネットワーク上の他の機器を検索し、その機器から番組情報を取得して予約録画を設定する。ネットワーク経由の予約録画機能の処理については後で詳細を説明する。 The network reservation recording application 501 is an application for providing the user with a reservation recording function via the network for performing recording reservation to another device on the home network. The network reservation recording application 501 controls the device detection unit 530, the content directory controller 525, the reservation recording setting controller 529, etc., searches for other devices on the home network, acquires program information from the devices, and performs reservation recording. Set The process of the scheduled recording function via the network will be described in detail later.
 なお、アプリ管理部450、及び、ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501は制御ソフトウェア500を構成するほとんど全てのソフトウェアブロックと制御やデータ参照などの関係を持つが、図が煩雑になるため他のソフトウェアブロックに対する関係線は省略する。 The application management unit 450 and the network reservation recording application 501 have a relationship such as control or data reference with almost all software blocks constituting the control software 500, but the relationship with other software blocks is complicated because the figure becomes complicated. The line is omitted.
 取得番組表生成部510は、番組情報取得部526を参照して、他の機器から取得した放送に対する電子番組表を生成する。これにより他機器が受信する放送の番組を選択して選局、あるいは所望の番組の録画や視聴の予約を可能にするユーザインターフェース(UI)を提供する。 The acquired program guide generation unit 510 generates an electronic program guide for a broadcast acquired from another device with reference to the program information acquisition unit 526. This provides a user interface (UI) that enables selection of a broadcast program to be received by another device to select a station or to make a recording or viewing reservation of a desired program.
 予約設定管理部514は、予約録画設定コントローラ529を介して他の機器に設定した予約録画設定の情報を保持し、管理する。 The reservation setting management unit 514 holds and manages information on reservation recording settings set to another device via the reservation recording setting controller 529.
 メディア受信コントローラ523は、ホームネットワーク、あるいは、公衆ネットワーク網4を介して送出されたコンテンツを受信し、記録再生部210に記録したり、あるいは、デマックス部203に出力する。また、ユーザ操作により配信の開始や停止、一時停止、スキップなどコンテンツの配信を制御するコマンドをコンテンツの配信元に送出する。また、対応する転送プロトコルの情報をメモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。 The media reception controller 523 receives the content sent through the home network or the public network 4, and records the content in the recording / reproducing unit 210 or outputs the content to the demux unit 203. In addition, a command for controlling the delivery of the content, such as start, stop, pause, or skip of delivery, is sent to the content delivery source by the user operation. Also, information on the corresponding transfer protocol is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210.
 コンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525は、ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501などの指示により、コンテンツのタイトル、ジャンルなどのメタデータ情報を要求し取得する。EPGのメタデータ情報を取得した場合は番番組情報取得部526に出力し、その他の映像や音声、画像などのコンテンツのメタデータ情報を取得した場合はコンテンツ情報取得部527に出力する。 The content directory controller 525 requests and acquires metadata information such as content title and genre according to an instruction from the network reservation recording application 501 or the like. When the metadata information of the EPG is acquired, it is outputted to the program information acquisition unit 526, and when the metadata information of the content such as other video, audio and image is acquired, it is outputted to the content information acquisition unit 527.
 番組情報取得部526は、他の機器から取得した番組情報を番組表データはメモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。このとき、番組情報の提供元の機器をホームネットワーク上で一意に識別するためのネットワークIDと対応付けて記録する。また、参照要求に応じて番組情報を取得番組表生成部510へ出力する。 The program information acquisition unit 526 records program information acquired from another device in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210 for program guide data. At this time, the device providing the program information is recorded in association with a network ID for uniquely identifying it on the home network. Further, the program information is output to the acquired program guide generation unit 510 in response to the reference request.
 コンテンツ情報取得部527はコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525が取得したコンテンツのメタデータ情報を保持し、ユーザにネットワークを介して取得可能なコンテンツの情報を提供するUI画面を生成する。 The content information acquisition unit 527 holds metadata information of the content acquired by the content directory controller 525, and generates a UI screen for providing the user with information of content that can be acquired via the network.
 ストリーミング接続コントローラ528は、他の機器に対して転送プロトコルやコンテンツの種類、データフォーマットの情報を要求する。 The streaming connection controller 528 requests information on transfer protocol, content type, and data format from other devices.
 予約録画設定コントローラ529は、他の機器に対して予約録画の登録や削除の設定や、予約されている録画の一覧情報などを要求する。 The scheduled recording setting controller 529 requests the other device to make settings for registration and deletion of scheduled recording, list information of scheduled recordings, and the like.
 機器検出部530は他の機器のネットワークへの接続や離脱の通知を検知し、制御対象の機器の接続を検知した場合には、その機器の機器記述情報や、サービス詳細情報を取得し、ネットワークIDやデバイスタイプなどで参照できる形式でメモリ213もしくは記録再生部210に記録する。また、接続状態管理情報として、接続の状態を示す接続状態情報と更新時刻情報(接続または離脱した日時を示す値)などを機器を特定するネットワークIDなどで参照できる形式で記録する。また、必要に応じて、ホームネットワーク上の所望の制御対象機器を検索するデバイス検索要求を送信する。離脱の通知を検知した場合は、接続状態を、離脱を示す値に更新、更新時刻情報を離脱の通知を検知した時刻に更新する。離脱した機器の機器記述情報や、サービス詳細情報は、離脱を検知したときに削除しても良いし、離脱から所定の時間(24時間など)経過した後に削除しても良い。 The device detection unit 530 detects a notification of connection or disconnection of another device to the network and detects the connection of the device to be controlled, acquires device description information of the device and service detailed information, and the network It is recorded in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210 in a format that can be referred to by an ID or a device type. Further, as the connection state management information, connection state information indicating the state of connection, update time information (value indicating date and time of connection or disconnection), and the like are recorded in a format that can be referenced by a network ID identifying the device. Also, if necessary, a device search request is sent to search for a desired control target device on the home network. When a notification of withdrawal is detected, the connection state is updated to a value indicating withdrawal, and the update time information is updated to the time at which the notification of withdrawal is detected. The device description information of the detached device and the service detailed information may be deleted when the detachment is detected, or may be deleted after a predetermined time (such as 24 hours) has elapsed since the detachment.
 ここで、機器情報サービス424が提供する機器記述情報の詳細について説明する。
  機器記述情報はデバイス情報とサービス情報リストなどの情報を含む。
Here, the details of the device description information provided by the device information service 424 will be described.
The device description information includes information such as device information and a service information list.
 デバイス情報は、機器についての基本的な情報を記述したもので、デバイスタイプ、機器の名称、メーカ名、モデル名、シリアル番号、ネットワークID、バージョン、アイコン情報などの情報を含む。 The device information describes basic information about the device, and includes information such as device type, device name, manufacturer name, model name, serial number, network ID, version, and icon information.
 デバイスタイプとは、機器がネットワークに提供する機能を示すものである。例えば、映像、音声、EPGの情報などコンテンツを配信する機能を持つ機器をメディアサーバ(MediaServer)、ネットワークを介してコンテンツを受信して再生する機能を持つ機器をメディアレンダラ(MediaRenderer)のように定義する。 The device type indicates the function provided by the device to the network. For example, a device with the function to deliver content such as video, audio, and EPG information is defined as a media server (MediaServer), and a device with a function to receive and play content via a network is defined as a media renderer (MediaRenderer) Do.
 ネットワークIDとは、ホームネットワーク上で機器を一意に識別するためのIDでメモリ213の不揮発性メモリに保持されている。 The network ID is an ID for uniquely identifying the device on the home network, and is held in the non-volatile memory of the memory 213.
 サービス情報リストは、機器が実装するデバイスタイプによってネットワークに提供されるサービスの一覧情報である。サービス毎に、サービスタイプ、サービスID、サービス記述URL(Uniform Resource Locator)、コントロールURL、イベントURLなどで構成される。 The service information list is list information of services provided to the network by the device type implemented by the device. Each service is composed of a service type, a service ID, a service description URL (Uniform Resource Locator), a control URL, an event URL and the like.
 デバイスタイプがメディアサーバ(MediaServer)である場合は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス(ContentDirectoryService)、ストリーミング接続サービス(ConnectionManagerService)、予約録画サービス(ScheduledRecordingService)などのサービスを提供する。 When the device type is a media server (MediaServer), services such as a content directory service (ContentDirectoryService), a streaming connection service (ConnectionManagerService), and a scheduled recording service (ScheduledRecordingService) are provided.
 サービスタイプとは、各サービスの機能を示すもので、上記したコンテンツディレクトリなどがこれに該当する。
  サービスIDは、この機器記述情報の範囲でサービスを一意に識別するIDである。
  サービス記述URLは、サービスが提供する制御を利用するための制御方法(アクション)の詳細について記述したサービス詳細情報を取得するためアクセス先である。
  コントロールURLは、サービスを使用して制御を行うためのアクションコマンドの送信先である。
  イベントURLはサービスでイベントが発生したときにその通知を受けるためにイベント配信登録を送信する登録先である。
The service type indicates the function of each service, and the above-mentioned content directory or the like corresponds to this.
The service ID is an ID that uniquely identifies a service within the range of the device description information.
The service description URL is an access destination in order to acquire service detailed information describing details of a control method (action) for using control provided by the service.
The control URL is a transmission destination of an action command for performing control using a service.
The event URL is a registration destination that transmits an event delivery registration to receive a notification when an event occurs in a service.
 サービス詳細情報は、アクションリストとサービス状態テーブルなどの情報を持つ。
  アクションリストは1つ以上のアクションの情報を含むリストである。アクションとはサービスが提供する制御を利用するための制御方法についての記述で、アクション名、および、引数毎に引数名、引数の入出力方向、型定義名を定めた一覧情報である引数リストなどの情報を持つ。
  サービス状態テーブルは1つ以上の状態変数情報を含むテーブルである。状態変数情報とはアクション使われる引数の型定義名、string、ui4など引数のデータ型、必要に応じてデフォルト値、設定可能な値のリスト、設定可能な値の範囲などの情報を持つ。
The service detail information has information such as an action list and a service status table.
An action list is a list containing information on one or more actions. An action is a description of a control method for using control provided by a service, such as an action name, and an argument list that is list information that defines an argument name, an input / output direction of an argument, and a type definition name for each argument. With the information of
The service state table is a table including one or more state variable information. State variable information includes information such as the type definition name of the argument used for action, the data type of the argument such as string and ui4, the default value as required, the list of settable values, and the range of settable values.
 図6は、番組情報送信装置110の機器記述情報の一例である。本実施例では機器記述情報600はデバイス情報610、サービス情報リスト620に加えて付加機能リスト630を持ち、デバイスタイプ611で定義されたデバイスが付加機能を提供する。 FIG. 6 shows an example of the device description information of the program information transmitting apparatus 110. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the device description information 600 has an additional function list 630 in addition to the device information 610 and the service information list 620, and the device defined by the device type 611 provides the additional function.
 図6において、番組情報送信装置110は、デバイス情報610内の611の記述でデバイスタイプが「MediaServer」であることが定義されている。サービス情報リスト620には、番組情報送信装置110が提供するサービス毎にサービスの情報を記述する。 In FIG. 6, in the program information transmitting apparatus 110, the device type is defined as "MediaServer" in the description of 611 in the device information 610. Service information list 620 describes service information for each service provided by program information transmitting apparatus 110.
 本実施例では番組情報送信装置110はサービス621、622などを提供している。
  サービス621は、サービスタイプ625が「ContentDirectory」で、サービス記述URL626に記述された「ContentDirectoryURL」にアクセスしてサービス詳細情報を取得できることを示している。
In the present embodiment, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides services 621, 622, and the like.
The service 621 indicates that the service type 625 is "Content Directory", and that "Content Directory URL" described in the service description URL 626 can be accessed to acquire service detailed information.
 コントロールURL627に記述された「CDControlURL」は、アクション要求の送信先を示す。 “CDControlURL” described in the control URL 627 indicates the destination of the action request.
 付加機能リスト630は、デバイスタイプ611で定義されたデバイスの基本機能に付加された付加機能を付加機能タイプで記述する。
  631の「EpgServer」は、番組情報送信装置110が受信した放送の番組情報を提供するEPGサーバ機能を提供することを示す。
  632の「EpgDirectScheduledRecorder」は、ネットワークを介して行う番組の予約録画を、EPGサーバにより提供される番組アイテムのIDプロパティを用いて設定できるEpgダイレクト予約録画機能を提供することを示す。
The additional function list 630 describes additional functions added to the basic functions of the device defined by the device type 611 as additional function types.
“EpgServer” 631 indicates that the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides an EPG server function of providing program information of the received broadcast.
“EpgDirectScheduledRecorder” 632 indicates providing an Epg direct scheduled recording function capable of setting scheduled recording of a program to be performed via the network using an ID property of a program item provided by the EPG server.
 このように、機器記述情報600に付加機能リスト630を追加することにより、他の機器は、機器記述情報600を取得するだけで、番組情報送信装置110がコンテンツを配信するメディアサーバであり、付加機能としてEPGサーバ機能とEpgダイレクト予約録画機能をネットワーク上の他の機器に提供していることを知ることができる。 ここで、番組情報送信装置110におけるEPGサーバ機能の実現方法について説明する。EPGサーバ機能はコンテンツディレクトリサービス425で提供する。
  コンテンツディレクトリサービス425は、番組情報送信装置110がネットワークに配信するコンテンツのメタデータを、サービスを受ける機器に提供し、提供されたメタデータの制御方法(アクション)はサービス詳細情報で提供する。
As described above, by adding the additional function list 630 to the device description information 600, the other device is a media server to which the program information transmitting apparatus 110 distributes the content only by acquiring the device description information 600. It is possible to know that the EPG server function and the Epg direct reservation recording function are provided to other devices on the network as functions. Here, a method of realizing the EPG server function in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 will be described. The EPG server function is provided by the content directory service 425.
The content directory service 425 provides metadata of content to be delivered to the network by the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to the device receiving the service, and provides a control method (action) of the provided metadata as service detailed information.
 ネットワークに配信するコンテンツの例としては、記録再生部210に記録した放送番組や写真などのAVコンテンツや、番組情報やチューナ情報などの情報コンテンツなどが挙げられる。メタデータとは、コンテンツのタイトル、ジャンル、コピー制御情報など、そのコンテンツに関するプロパティ情報である。 Examples of the contents to be distributed to the network include AV contents such as broadcast programs and pictures recorded in the recording / reproducing unit 210, and information contents such as program information and tuner information. Metadata is property information on the content, such as the title, genre, and copy control information of the content.
 図7にコンテンツディレクトリサービス425のサービス詳細情報のアクションリストの一例を示す。
  図に示すように、アクション毎にアクション名と引数リストを設定する。図7では710、720、730、740、750、760、770が各アクションを示す。アクション710のアクション名が711、引数リストが712である。引数リストには1つ以上の引数の情報を列挙する。
FIG. 7 shows an example of the action list of the service detailed information of the content directory service 425.
As shown in the figure, set an action name and an argument list for each action. In FIG. 7, 710, 720, 730, 740, 750, 760, and 770 show each action. The action name of the action 710 is 711 and the argument list is 712. The argument list enumerates the information of one or more arguments.
 図7では1行で1つの引数の情報を示している。791の列は引数名、792の列は入出力方向(INまたはOUT)、793の列は型定義名を示す。型定義名で示された型(状態変数)の詳細情報は図8のサービス状態テーブルに記述される。 In FIG. 7, information of one argument is shown on one line. Column 791 indicates an argument name, column 792 indicates an input / output direction (IN or OUT), and column 793 indicates a type definition name. The detailed information of the type (state variable) indicated by the type definition name is described in the service state table of FIG.
 図8はコンテンツディレクトリサービス425のサービス詳細情報のサービス状態テーブルの一例である。図8で810、820、830、840、850、860が状態変数の詳細情報である。状態変数の詳細情報は状態変数の名前831、データ型832、および、必要に応じて設定可能な値の定義(許可値)834、835を1つ以上含む許可値リスト833などで構成する。 FIG. 8 shows an example of the service status table of the service detailed information of the content directory service 425. In FIG. 8, 810, 820, 830, 840, 850 and 860 are detailed information of the state variable. The detailed information of the state variable includes the state variable name 831, data type 832, and a permitted value list 833 including one or more definitions (permitted values) 834 and 835 of values that can be set as needed.
 コンテンツディレクトリサービス425を利用する装置は、アクションの引数の型定義名を用いてサービス状態テーブルを参照し、引数のデータ型名などの詳細情報を取得できる。一例を示すと、アクション720のBrowseの引数BrowseFlagの型定義名はA_ARG_TYPE_BrowseFlagである。この装置は、型定義名がA_ARG_TYPE_BrowseFlagである場合、サービス状態テーブル(図8)を参照し、名前が一致する状態変数の詳細情報830から引数のデータ型がstringで、設定できる値が“BrowseMetadata”、“BrowseDirectChildren”であることを知ることができる。 An apparatus using the content directory service 425 can refer to the service state table using the type definition name of the argument of the action, and can acquire detailed information such as the data type name of the argument. As an example, the type definition name of the Browse argument of the Browse argument of the action 720 is A_ARG_TYPE_BrowseFlag. If the type definition name is A_ARG_TYPE_BrowseFlag, this device refers to the service status table (FIG. 8), and from the detailed information 830 of the state variable whose name matches, the data type of the argument is string and the value that can be set is "BrowseMetadata" , "BrowseDirectChildren" can be known.
 アクションの要求メッセージと応答メッセージは、例えば、HTTPプロトコルを用いてSOAPメッセージでカプセル化して送信する。このとき、アクション名や入出力の引数はSOAPボディにXML(Extensible Markup Language)形式で記述される。アクション要求の送付先は、機器記述情報600のサービス情報リスト620で、サービス毎にコントロールURL627として記述される。 The request message and the response message of the action are encapsulated in a SOAP message and transmitted using, for example, the HTTP protocol. At this time, the action name and input / output arguments are described in the SOAP body in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format. The destination of the action request is described in the service information list 620 of the device description information 600 as the control URL 627 for each service.
 以下、図7に示されたアクションの中で本実施例に係る番組情報の送信に関連するアクションである710について説明する。 Hereinafter, among the actions shown in FIG. 7, an action 710 related to transmission of program information according to the present embodiment will be described.
 GetFeatureList711はコンテンツディレクトリサービス425がAVコンテンツの他に情報コンテンツも提供する場合に、提供できる情報コンテンツの名前などの情報を提供するアクションである。図9はアクションGetFeatureListのアクション要求により、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425から応答メッセージとして送信されるFeatureListの一例である。 GetFeatureList 711 is an action that provides information such as the name of information content that can be provided when the content directory service 425 provides information content as well as AV content. FIG. 9 is an example of FeatureList transmitted as a response message from the content directory service 425 in response to an action request of action GetFeatureList.
 910は、FeatureListを記述したXMLドキュメントである。
  920は、XMLヘッダである。
  930に示すように、<Features>タグでコンテンツディレクトリサービス425が提供する情報コンテンツの情報の一覧を記述する。各情報コンテンツの情報は931、932に示すように<Feature>タグで記述する。
An XML document 910 describes FeatureList.
920 is an XML header.
As shown in 930, the <Features> tag describes a list of information of information content provided by the content directory service 425. Information of each information content is described by <Feature> tag as shown in 931 and 932.
 <Feature>タグのname属性は、情報コンテンツの名前を示す。
  “EPG”は番組情報を、“TUNER”はチューナ情報を提供することを示す。
  <objectIDs>タグにはname属性で指定された情報コンテンツを特定するIDを記述する。情報コンテンツを複数提供する場合は932に示すように“,(カンマ)”で区切ってIDを列挙する。
The name attribute of the <Feature> tag indicates the name of the information content.
"EPG" indicates that program information is provided, and "TUNER" indicates that tuner information is provided.
The <objectIDs> tag describes an ID for identifying the information content designated by the name attribute. In the case of providing a plurality of information contents, as shown at 932, the IDs are listed separated by ", (comma)".
 なお、“EPG”のobjectIDは提供する番組情報のrootコンテナであるEPGコンテナの@idプロパティ(図12)に対応する。EPGコンテナはCATV放送、地上デジタル放送、BS放送のような放送システムの単位で提供する。放送システム単位で提供することで、EPGクライアント機能を持つ機器は、EPGサーバ機能を持つ機器がネットワーク上に複数存在する場合でも、所望の放送システムのEPGを提供する機器を容易に探索できる。EPGコンテナは放送システムの情報を保持するコンテナである。 The object ID of “EPG” corresponds to the @id property (FIG. 12) of the EPG container which is the root container of the provided program information. The EPG container is provided in units of broadcasting systems such as CATV broadcasting, terrestrial digital broadcasting, and BS broadcasting. By providing on a broadcast system basis, a device having an EPG client function can easily search for a device that provides an EPG of a desired broadcast system, even when there are a plurality of devices having an EPG server function on the network. An EPG container is a container that holds information of a broadcast system.
 ここで、図10でEPGサーバ機能が提供する番組情報の全体構成例を説明する。
  EPGコンテナ(epg container)1001は、番組情報の最上位のrootコンテナであり、放送システムの情報を保持する。EPGコンテナ1001は、この放送システムで提供する編成チャンネルの数だけチャンネルコンテナを持つ。チャンネルコンテナにはテレビ放送のような映像放送を示すビデオチャンネルコンテナ(epgVideoChannel container)1010、1020と、ラジオ放送のような音声放送を示すオーディオチャンネルコンテナ(epgAudioChannel container)1030を定義する。さらにチャンネルコンテナは、そのチャンネルで放送する番組の情報を提供する番組アイテムを持つ。番組アイテムには映像番組を示すEPGビデオ番組アイテム(videoProgram item)1011、1012、1013、1021,1022,1023と音声番組を示すEPGオーディオ番組アイテム(audioProgram item)1031、1032を定義する。なお、本実施例では、EPGコンテナ、チャンネルコンテナ、番組アイテムを総称してEPGオブジェクトと呼ぶ。
Here, an example of the overall configuration of program information provided by the EPG server function will be described with reference to FIG.
An EPG container (epg container) 1001 is a top-level root container of program information, and holds information of the broadcasting system. The EPG container 1001 has as many channel containers as the number of organized channels provided by this broadcast system. The channel containers define video channel containers (epgVideoChannel container) 1010 and 1020 indicating video broadcasts such as television broadcasts, and audio channel containers (epgAudioChannel container) 1030 indicating audio broadcasts such as radio broadcasts. In addition, the channel container has program items that provide information on programs broadcast on that channel. As program items, EPG video program items (video Program items) 1011, 1012, 1013, 1021, 1022, 1023 indicating video programs and EPG audio program items (audio Program items) 1031, 1032 indicating audio programs are defined. In the present embodiment, the EPG container, the channel container, and the program item are collectively referred to as an EPG object.
 各コンテナ、アイテムに定義されるプロパティ情報の詳細を図12、図13、図14、図15に示す。ここで定義するプロパティはネットワーク書式の番組情報であるEPGオブジェクトに用いるものである。番組情報変換部412が番組情報をデジタル放送で用いられる放送書式の番組情報を用いて変換し、生成する。 Details of property information defined in each container and item are shown in FIG. 12, FIG. 13, FIG. 14, and FIG. The properties defined here are used for an EPG object which is program information in a network format. The program information conversion unit 412 converts and generates program information using program information of a broadcast format used in digital broadcasting.
 図12は番組情報を提供するコンテナ、および、アイテムに共通に定義されるプロパティである。”@”はこのプロパティが属性情報であることを示す。以後、「属性id」と記述した場合は図12の「@id」であることを表す。同様に、「属性parentID」と記述した場合は図12の「@restricted」であることを、「属性restricted」と記述した場合は図12の「@restricted」であることを表す。番組アイテムにおいて属性idはその番組アイテムに記述された番組を一意に特定する識別情報である。属性parentIDはその番組アイテムを持つチャンネルコンテナの属性idを示す。
  図13はEPGコンテナ、図14(a)~(b)はビデオチャンネルコンテナ、図15(a)~(h)はEPGビデオ番組アイテムのプロパティ情報である。オーディオチャンネルコンテナのプロパティ情報は図14のビデオチャンネルコンテナのプロパティと“catv:class”プロパティの値が異なるだけなので記載を省略する。
FIG. 12 shows containers for providing program information, and properties commonly defined for items. "@" Indicates that this property is attribute information. Hereinafter, when "attribute id" is described, it indicates that it is "@ id" in FIG. Similarly, when “attribute parentID” is described, “@restricted” in FIG. 12 is indicated, and when “attribute restricted” is described, “@ restricted” in FIG. 12 is indicated. In the program item, the attribute id is identification information that uniquely identifies the program described in the program item. The attribute parentID indicates the attribute id of the channel container having the program item.
FIG. 13 shows an EPG container, FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (b) show video channel containers, and FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (h) show property information of EPG video program items. The property information of the audio channel container is omitted since it is different from the property of the video channel container of FIG. 14 and the value of the "catv: class" property.
 オーディオチャンネルコンテナでは、”object.container.epgContainer.epgAudioChannel”と半角文字列で記述する。EPGオーディオ番組アイテムのプロパティ情報は図15のEPGビデオ番組アイテムのプロパティと“upnp:class”プロパティの値が異なるだけなので記載を省略する。EPGオーディオ番組アイテムでは“object.item.epgItem.audioProgram”と半角文字列で記述する。 In the audio channel container, write "object.container.epgContainer.epgAudioChannel" as a half-width character string. The property information of the EPG audio program item will not be described because it is different only in the property of the EPG video program item in FIG. 15 and the value of the "upnp: class" property. An EPG audio program item is described as "object.item.epgItem.audioProgram" as a single-byte character string.
 図16はEPGコンテナを例に、プロパティ定義をXMLドキュメントで記述した場合を示す。1610はEPGコンテナのXMLドキュメントである。EPGコンテナはcontainerオブジェクトなので1611、1615に示すように<container></container>タグで囲む。そして、1620で破線で囲って示すように、<container></container>タグの中に、図13で定義したEPGコンテナのプロパティ情報を列挙する。図に示すように、プロパティ名をそれぞれXMLタグとして記述する。 FIG. 16 shows the case where the property definition is described in an XML document, using the EPG container as an example. 1610 is an XML document of the EPG container. Since the EPG container is a container object, it is surrounded by <container> </ container> tags as shown in 1611 and 1615. Then, as indicated by a dashed line 1620, property information of the EPG container defined in FIG. 13 is listed in the <container> </ container> tag. As shown in the figure, each property name is described as an XML tag.
 1162のid、1163のparentID、1164のrestrictedは図12で定義されたコンテナ、および、アイテムに共通の属性情報である。 EPGコンテナにおいて、id(属性id)1162にはそのEPGを提供する放送システムを一意に識別する識別子として、NITに含まれるnetwork_id(ネットワーク識別)の値を記述する。parentID(属性parentID)には親コンテナの属性IDを記述する。最上位コンテナ(rootコンテナ)の場合は“-1”と記述する。図16の例では、複数の放送システムのEPGを提供できるシステムを想定して、EPGコンテナの上位コンテナの属性idを“epgTop”と記述している。restricted(属性restricted)1164にはオブジェクトを変更できるかどうかを記述する。EPGの情報は基本的に、受信した放送のPESあるいはESに含まれる番組特定情報(PSI)、あるいは、番組配列情報(SI)から取得し、変更できない情報である。そのため、EPGオブジェクトには変更が許可されないことを示す“1”を指定する。 The id of 1162, the parent ID of 1163, and the restricted of 1164 are attribute information common to the container and item defined in FIG. In the EPG container, an id (attribute id) 1162 describes a value of network_id (network identification) included in the NIT as an identifier uniquely identifying a broadcast system that provides the EPG. In parentID (attribute parentID), the attribute ID of the parent container is described. In the case of the top-level container (root container), write "-1". In the example of FIG. 16, the attribute id of the upper container of the EPG container is described as "epgTop" on the assumption that the system can provide the EPGs of a plurality of broadcast systems. The restricted (attribute restricted) 1164 describes whether the object can be modified. The EPG information is basically information that can not be changed, obtained from program specification information (PSI) included in the received PES or ES of the broadcast, or program arrangement information (SI). Therefore, “1” indicating that change is not permitted is designated in the EPG object.
 なお、番組特定情報(PSI)には伝送路の情報などを記述するネットワーク情報テーブル(NIT:Network Information Table)などが有り、番組配列情報(SI)には放送局などサービス(編成チャンネル)に関する情報を記述するサービス記述テーブル(SDT:Service Description Table)や、電子番組表で利用する番組の放送時間、番組名(イベント名)、番組の内容を説明する番組記述など番組に関する情報を記述するイベント情報テーブル(EIT:Event Information Table)などが有る。 The program identification information (PSI) includes a network information table (NIT: Network Information Table) that describes information on transmission paths and the like, and the program arrangement information (SI) includes information on services (organized channels) such as a broadcast station Event description information such as a service description table (SDT) describing a program, a broadcast time of a program used in an electronic program guide, a program name (event name), and a program description describing the content of the program There is a table (EIT: Event Information Table) and the like.
 ビデオチャンネルコンテナなど他のcontainerオブジェクトも構成は同じである。<container></container>タグが<item></item>タグとなる。それ以外の構成は図16と同じである。 The configuration is the same for other container objects such as video channel containers. The <container> </ container> tag is the <item> </ item> tag. The other configuration is the same as that of FIG.
 ビデオチャンネルコンテナにおいて、属性idには、その編成チャンネルを一意に特定する識別子として、SDTに含まれるservice_id(サービス識別)の値を記述する。属性parentIDには、親コンテナ、すなわち、その編成チャンネル提供する放送システムのEPGコンテナの属性idを記述する。図10で説明すると、ビデオチャンネルコンテナ1010の属性parentIDには、EPGコンテナ1001の属性idが記述される。 In the video channel container, the attribute id describes the value of service_id (service identification) included in the SDT as an identifier that uniquely identifies the organization channel. The attribute parentID describes the attribute id of the parent container, that is, the EPG container of the broadcast system providing the organized channel. Referring to FIG. 10, in the attribute parentID of the video channel container 1010, the attribute id of the EPG container 1001 is described.
 EPGビデオ番組アイテムにおいて、属性idにはその番組を一意に特定する識別子として、EITに含まれるevent_id(イベント識別)の値を記述する。属性parentIDには、親コンテナ、すなわち、その番組を提供するチャンネルのチャンネルコンテナの属性idを記述する。図10で説明すると、EPGビデオ番組アイテム1011、1012、1013の属性parentIDには、ビデオチャンネルコンテナ1010の属性idが記述される。 In the EPG video program item, the attribute id describes the value of event_id (event identification) included in the EIT as an identifier for uniquely identifying the program. The attribute parentID describes the attribute id of the parent container, ie, the channel container of the channel providing the program. Referring to FIG. 10, the attribute id of the video channel container 1010 is described in the attribute parentID of the EPG video program items 1011, 1012, 1013.
 なお、コンテナは1つ以上のコンテナ、あるいは、アイテムを含むことができる。 Note that a container can contain one or more containers or items.
 図17はEPGコンテナがチャンネルコンテナ、番組アイテムを含む場合のXMLドキュメントの例である。図中、実線はコンテナ、もしくは、アイテムを示し、破線はコンテナのプロパティ情報、もしくは、アイテムのプロパティ情報を列挙したものである。コンテナ、もしくは、アイテムは1つ以上のプロパティ情報を持つ。 FIG. 17 is an example of an XML document in the case where the EPG container includes a channel container and a program item. In the figure, solid lines indicate containers or items, and broken lines indicate container property information or item property information. Containers or items have one or more property information.
 図において、1710はEPGコンテナ1001で、内部に複数のチャンネルコンテナ1712、1718などを含む。さらに、チャンネルコンテナ1712は複数の番組アイテム1714、1716などを含む。このように、番組情報の階層構成をXMLドキュメントで表すことができる。 In the figure, reference numeral 1710 denotes an EPG container 1001, which includes a plurality of channel containers 1712 and 1718 inside. Further, channel container 1712 includes a plurality of program items 1714, 1716, and the like. Thus, the hierarchical structure of program information can be represented by an XML document.
 図7の740、750、760、770はEPGサーバ機能として番組情報を提供するために定義したアクションである。各アクションの詳細を以下で説明する。 In FIG. 7, 740, 750, 760 and 770 are actions defined to provide program information as an EPG server function. The details of each action are described below.
 740のX_EPG_ChannelLineup741は、放送システムが提供する編成チャンネルの一覧情報を返すアクションである。
  入力引数ObjectIDには「GetFeatureList」アクションで取得したEPGコンテナの識別子を指定する。
The X_EPG_ChannelLineup 741 of 740 is an action that returns list information of organization channels provided by the broadcast system.
In the input argument ObjectID, the identifier of the EPG container acquired by the "GetFeatureList" action is specified.
 図11(a)、図11(b)に「X_EPG_ChannelLineup」アクションの要求メッセージと応答メッセージの一例を示す。図11(a)が要求メッセージ「Request」で、図11(b)が応答メッセージ「Response」である。 FIGS. 11A and 11B show an example of a request message and a response message of the “X_EPG_ChannelLineup” action. FIG. 11A shows the request message “Request”, and FIG. 11B shows the response message “Response”.
 1101は、要求メッセージに与える引数objectIDである。この例では「GetFeatureList」アクションで取得したEPGコンテナの識別子“catvEPG”931を指定している。
  1110は、要求メッセージで得られるResultを記述したXMLドキュメントである。
  1120は、XMLヘッダである。1130、1140、1150はチャンネルコンテナである。1つのチャンネルコンテナを<container></container>タグで囲んで表し、放送システムが提供する編成チャンネルの数だけ列挙する。
1101 is an argument objectID given to the request message. In this example, the identifier "catvEPG" 931 of the EPG container acquired by the "GetFeatureList" action is specified.
1110 is an XML document which describes Result obtained by a request message.
1120 is an XML header. 1130, 1140 and 1150 are channel containers. One channel container is represented by <container></container> tags, and the number is equal to the number of organized channels provided by the broadcast system.
 container id属性は、そのコンテナを一意に特定する識別子である。
  parentID属性は、このコンテナの親コンテナを特定する識別子である。すなわち、このチャンネルを提供する放送システムを示す。
  <restricted>属性はオブジェクトを変更できるかどうかを示す。ここでは、番組情報を取得した側で変更することが許可されないことを示す“1”を指定する。なお、変更することが許可されている場合は“0”を指定する。
The container id attribute is an identifier that uniquely identifies the container.
The parentID attribute is an identifier that identifies the parent container of this container. That is, a broadcast system providing this channel is shown.
The <restricted> attribute indicates whether the object can be modified. Here, “1” is designated to indicate that changing the program information is not permitted. When the change is permitted, “0” is designated.
 X_EPG_Program751は放送システムで提供される放送プログラムの情報を返すものである。入力引数ObjectIDに放送システムのIDを指定した場合は、その放送システムで提供する全番組の情報の一覧を、チャンネルのIDを指定した場合はそのチャンネルで提供する全番組の情報の一覧を返す。 The X_EPG_Program 751 is for returning information on the broadcast program provided by the broadcast system. When a broadcast system ID is designated as the input argument ObjectID, a list of information of all programs provided by the broadcast system is returned. When a channel ID is designated, a list of information of all programs provided by the channel is returned.
 放送システムのIDとは「GetFeatureList」アクションで取得した“catvEPG”(図9、931のobjectIDsタグの記述)であり、チャンネルのIDとは「X_EPG_ChannelLineup」アクションで取得した“ch-001”(図11(b)、1130のcontainerタグのid属性1132)などである。 The ID of the broadcasting system is "catvEPG" (description of the objectIDs tag in FIG. 9, 931) acquired by the "GetFeatureList" action, and the channel ID is "ch-001" acquired by the "X_EPG_ChannelLineup" action. (B), id attribute 1132 of 1130's container tag, and the like.
 入力引数TermCriteriaには取得する番組情報のフィルタリング条件を入力する。例えば、番組名にサッカーを含む番組の番組情報を取得したい場合は、”dc:title contains “サッカー””のように記述する。入力引数TermCriteriaを指定しない場合は、入力引数ObjectIDで指定されたオブジェクトが提供する全番組の情報を返す。 In the input argument TermCriteria, the filtering condition of the program information to be acquired is input. For example, when it is desired to acquire program information of a program including soccer in the program name, it is described as "dc: title contains" soccer ". If the input argument TermCriteria is not specified, information on all programs provided by the object specified by the input argument ObjectID is returned.
 図18は「X_EPG_Program」アクションに対する応答メッセージで得られるResultを記述したXMLドキュメントの一例である。
  図18は入力引数ObjectIDにチャンネルのID“ch-001”を指定した場合の例である。図中、実線は図17と同様にアイテムを示し、破線はアイテムのプロパティ情報を示す。アイテムは1つ以上のプロパティ情報を持つ。
FIG. 18 is an example of an XML document describing Result obtained in a response message to the “X_EPG_Program” action.
FIG. 18 shows an example where the channel ID "ch-001" is specified in the input argument ObjectID. In the figure, solid lines indicate items as in FIG. 17, and broken lines indicate item property information. An item has one or more property information.
 1820は、XMLヘッダである。
  図に示すように、「X_EPG_Program」アクションに対する応答メッセージには、入力引数ObjectIDで指定されたチャンネルのID“ch-001”が提供する放送番組の情報である番組アイテムを<Item>タグで表して列挙する。1831、1833、1835がそれぞれ番組アイテムである。
1820 is an XML header.
As shown in the figure, in the response message to the "X_EPG_Program" action, a program item which is information of a broadcast program provided by the ID "ch-001" of the channel designated by the input argument ObjectID is represented by an <Item> tag. To enumerate. Reference numerals 1831, 1833 and 1835 are program items, respectively.
 <Item>タグの属性idは、そのアイテムを一意に特定するIDである。
  属性parentIDは親コンテナのIDである。すなわち、この番組がチャンネル“ch-001”で提供されるものであることを示す。
  <restricted>属性はオブジェクトを変更できるかどうかを示す。ここでは、番組情報を取得した側で変更することが許可されないことを示す“1”を指定する。
The attribute id of the <Item> tag is an ID that uniquely identifies the item.
The attribute parentID is the ID of the parent container. That is, it indicates that this program is provided on channel "ch-001".
The <restricted> attribute indicates whether the object can be modified. Here, “1” is designated to indicate that changing the program information is not permitted.
 番組アイテム1831、1833、1835は、1832、1834、1836に示すように、それぞれのプロパティ情報を持つ。
  1832の<dc:title>タグは図15(a)で説明した通り番組のイベント名(番組タイトル)である。
  <upnp:class>タグは、図15(h)で説明した通り、オブジェクトの分類、本例の場合は番組アイテムの分類を定義するものである。
  object.item.epgItem.videoProgramは、このアイテムがEPGビデオ番組アイテムであることを示している。1832に挙げたプロパティ情報は番組アイテムのプロパティ情報の一例であり、全てではない。また、1834、1836には具体例を挙げていないが構成は1832と同様である。
Program items 1831, 1833, 1835 have respective property information as shown in 1832, 1834, 1836.
The <dc: title> tag of 1832 is an event name (program title) of a program as described in FIG.
The <upnp: class> tag, as described in FIG. 15 (h), defines the classification of objects, in this example, the classification of program items.
object.item. epgItem. videoProgram indicates that this item is an EPG video program item. The property information listed in 1832 is an example of the property information of the program item and is not all. Although no specific example is given for 1834 and 1836, the configuration is similar to 1832.
 X_EPG_CurrentNextProgram761は現在放送中の番組と、その次に放送予定の番組の放送プログラムの情報を返すものである。入力引数ObjectIDに放送システムのIDを指定した場合は、その放送システムで提供する全チャンネルについて、チャンネルのIDを指定した場合はそのチャンネルに関して、現在と次の番組の放送番組のプロパティ情報の一覧を返す。応答メッセージは、出力引数Resultに含まれる番組アイテムを現在の放送番組と次の放送予定番組で構成すること以外は図18と同様の形式となる。 X_EPG_CurrentNextProgram 761 is for returning information on a program currently being broadcast and a broadcast program of a program scheduled to be broadcast next. When a broadcast system ID is specified in the input argument ObjectID, for all channels provided by that broadcast system, when a channel ID is specified, a list of property information of current and next program broadcast programs is displayed for that channel. return. The response message has the same format as that of FIG. 18 except that the program item included in the output argument Result is composed of the current broadcast program and the next broadcast scheduled program.
 X_EPG_KeywordSearchProgram771は、キーワードを満たす番組のプロパティ情報を返すものである。入力引数ObjectIDに放送システムのIDを指定した場合は、その放送システムで提供する全チャンネルについて、チャンネルのIDを指定した場合はそのチャンネルに関して、キーワードを満たす番組の放送全番組のプロパティ情報の一覧を返す。
  応答メッセージは、出力引数Resultに含まれる番組アイテムをキーワードを満たす番組で構成すること以外は図18と同様の形式となる。
X_EPG_KeywordSearchProgram 771 is for returning property information of a program that satisfies the keyword. When a broadcast system ID is specified in the input argument ObjectID, for all channels provided by the broadcast system, when a channel ID is specified, a list of property information of all broadcast programs of programs satisfying the keyword is displayed for that channel. return.
The response message has the same format as that of FIG. 18 except that the program item included in the output argument Result is configured by a program satisfying the keyword.
 なお、アクション740、750、760、770の入出力引数は一例である。例えば、入力引数として、応答のデータ量を制限するために応答に含まれる<container>あるいは<item>の数を制限する引数などを追加してもよい。 The input and output arguments of the actions 740, 750, 760, and 770 are an example. For example, as an input argument, an argument that limits the number of <container> or <item> included in the response may be added to limit the amount of data of the response.
 以上説明したように、番組情報送信装置110は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425で番組情報を返すアクションを提供することでEPGサーバ機能を実現する。 As described above, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 implements the EPG server function by providing the action of returning program information by the content directory service 425.
 次に、番組情報受信装置140が、ネットワークに接続された番組情報送信装置110を探索し、ネットワーク経由で番組情報送信装置110に予約録画を設定する手順を説明する。 Next, a procedure will be described in which the program information receiving apparatus 140 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 connected to the network, and sets scheduled recording in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network.
 図19は番組情報受信装置140がネットワーク上にある番組情報送信装置110を探索し、EPGサーバ情報を取得する手順である。番組情報受信装置140における探索処理はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501のEPGサーバ探索シーケンスとして実行される。 FIG. 19 shows the procedure of the program information receiving apparatus 140 searching for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network and acquiring EPG server information. The search process in the program information receiver 140 is executed as an EPG server search sequence of the network reservation recording application 501.
 S1910:番組情報受信装置140の機器検出部530はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の指示に従って、メッセージ生成部422、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介してネットワーク上のEPGサーバを探索するため、EPGサーバ機能を提供するMediaServer(DMS)を探索する「デバイス探索」メッセージをホームネットワークを構成する全ての機器に送信する。 S1910: The device detection unit 530 of the program information reception apparatus 140 provides an EPG server function to search for an EPG server on the network via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501. Search for MediaServer (DMS) Send a "device search" message to all the devices that make up the home network.
 S1911:DMSを探索する「デバイス探索」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、機器情報サービス424でそのメッセージを処理する。番組情報送信装置110のデバイスタイプはMediaServerであるので、機器情報サービス424は自身の機器記述情報の取得先を示すURI(Uniform Resource Identifier)を含むメッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置140に応答する。 S1911: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the “device search” message for searching the DMS processes the message with the device information service 424. Since the device type of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is MediaServer, the device information service 424 generates a message including a URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) indicating the acquisition destination of its own device description information, and responds to the program information receiving device 140. .
 S1912:応答を受信した番組情報受信装置140の機器検出部530は、応答メッセージに含まれるURIにアクセスし、番組情報送信装置110へ機器記述情報を要求する「デバイス情報要求」メッセージを送信する。 S1912: The device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving device 140 that has received the response accesses the URI included in the response message, and transmits a “device information request” message requesting device description information to the program information transmitting device 110.
 S1913:機器記述情報の取得先URIへの「デバイス情報要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、機器情報サービス424でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、図6に示した機器記述情報を含むメッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置140に応答する。機器記述情報は、XMLなどの形式で応答メッセージに記述される。 S1913: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “device information request” message to the acquisition destination URI of the device description information processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, a message including the device description information shown in FIG. 6 is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 140 responds. Device description information is described in the response message in a format such as XML.
 S1914:応答を受信した番組情報受信装置140の機器検出部530は、応答メッセージを解釈し、番組情報送信装置110がコンテンツディレクトリサービス425(ContentDirectoryService)や予約録画サービス429(ScheduledRecordingService)などを提供することを認識し、各サービスのサービス記述URLにアクセスし、番組情報送信装置110へサービスの詳細情報を要求する「サービス情報要求」メッセージを送信する。 S1914: The device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the response interprets the response message, and the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the content directory service 425 (Content Directory Service), the scheduled recording service 429 (Scheduled Recording Service), etc. , Accesses the service description URL of each service, and transmits a “service information request” message requesting the program information transmission device 110 for detailed information on the service.
 S1915:コンテンツディレクトリサービス425と予約録画サービス429のサービス記述URLへの「サービス情報要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、機器情報サービス424でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、図7、図8に示したようにとしてアクションリストとサービス状態テーブルとを含むサービスの詳細情報を用いて応答メッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置140に応答する。 S1915: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “service information request” message to the service description URL of the content directory service 425 and the scheduled recording service 429 processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, a response message is generated using the service detailed information including the action list and the service status table, and the program information receiving device 140 is responded.
 S1916:応答を受信した番組情報受信装置140の機器検出部530は、コンテンツディレクトリサービスのサービス詳細情報をコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525へ渡す。予約録画サービスのサービス詳細情報は予約録画設定コントローラ529に渡す。各コントローラはサービス詳細情報を解釈し、各サービスが提供するアクションを認識する。そして、コンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の指示に従って、番組情報送信装置110のコンテンツディレクトリサービスがEPGを提供するかを確認するためにFeatureListアクションを送信する。 S1916: The device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the response passes the service detailed information of the content directory service to the content directory controller 525. Detailed service information of the scheduled recording service is passed to the scheduled recording setting controller 529. Each controller interprets service detail information and recognizes an action provided by each service. Then, the content directory controller 525 transmits the FeatureList action in order to confirm whether the content directory service of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the EPG according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
 S1917:FeatureListアクションを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、図9に示したような、番組情報送信装置110が提供する情報コンテンツ一覧情報を返すメッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置140に応答する。応答メッセージを受信したコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525は<Features>タグ930に含まれる<Feature>931、932のname属性に“EPG”を含むものが存在することから、番組情報送信装置110が番組情報を提供するEPGサーバであることを認識し、また、その<objectIDs>タグからEPGを取得するためのIDを得る(931)。ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501は探索したEPGサーバ(番組情報送信装置)110の機器記述情報、サービスの詳細情報、および、FeatureListアクションで取得した情報コンテンツ一覧情報などEPGサーバ情報を、番組情報送信装置110のネットワークIDなどで参照できる形式でメモリ213に記憶する。 S1917: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the FeatureList action processes the message by the content directory service 425. Then, a message for returning information content list information provided by the program information transmitting apparatus 110 as shown in FIG. 9 is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 140 responds. Since the content directory controller 525 that has received the response message includes “EPG” in the name attribute of <Feature> 931, 932 included in the <Features> tag 930, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the program information It recognizes that it is an EPG server and obtains an ID for acquiring an EPG from its <objectIDs> tag (931). The network reservation recording application 501 can transmit EPG server information such as device description information of the searched EPG server (program information transmitting apparatus) 110, detailed information of the service, and information content list information acquired by the FeatureList action to the EPG information of the program information transmitting apparatus 110. It is stored in the memory 213 in a format that can be referenced by a network ID or the like.
 S1910の「デバイス探索」メッセージに対して複数の番組情報送信装置から応答があった場合は、それぞれの番組情報送信装置に対してS1912からS1917のシーケンスを行いEPGサーバ(番組情報送信装置)のEPGサーバ情報を取得しメモリ213に記憶する。また、発見したEPGサーバの数もメモリ213に記憶する。 When there is a response from a plurality of program information transmitters in response to the "device search" message of S1910, the sequence of S1912 to S1917 is performed for each program information transmitter, and the EPG of the EPG server (program information transmitter) The server information is acquired and stored in the memory 213. In addition, the number of found EPG servers is also stored in the memory 213.
 以上の手順で、番組情報受信装置140は番組情報送信装置110を探索する。この探索手順の実行タイミングは番組情報受信装置140がネットワークに接続されたときでも、ユーザがネットワーク上のEPGサーバの探索を要求したときでもよい。ユーザの要求にかかわらず、ネットワークに接続されたときに探索する場合は、ユーザから要求があった際にユーザを待たせず探索結果を提示できる利点がある。 The program information receiving apparatus 140 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the above procedure. The execution timing of the search procedure may be when the program information receiving apparatus 140 is connected to the network or when the user requests a search for an EPG server on the network. Regardless of the user's request, searching when connected to the network has the advantage of being able to present the search results without having to wait for the user when requested by the user.
 図20は番組情報受信装置140がネットワーク上にある番組情報送信装置110からEPG情報を取得する手順である。番組情報受信装置140におけるEPG情報取得処理はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501によってEPG情報取得シーケンスとして実行される。 FIG. 20 shows the procedure of the program information receiving apparatus 140 acquiring EPG information from the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network. The EPG information acquisition processing in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network reservation recording application 501 as an EPG information acquisition sequence.
 S2010:番組情報受信装置140のコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の指示に従って、番組情報送信装置110が提供するEPGの編成チャンネルの一覧情報を取得するためにX_EPG_ChannelLineupアクションを送信する。
  このとき、入力引数ObjectIDには図19のS1917で取得した情報コンテンツ一覧情報に含まれる<Features>のname属性が“EPG”である要素の<objectIDs>を用いる。アクションメッセージはメッセージ生成部422、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介して送出される。アクションメッセージの例を図11(a)に示す。
S2010: The content directory controller 525 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits an X_EPG_ChannelLineup action in order to acquire list information of organization channels of the EPG provided by the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
At this time, <objectIDs> of an element whose name attribute of <Features> included in the information content list information acquired in S1917 of FIG. 19 is “EPG” is used as the input argument ObjectID. The action message is sent out via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420. An example of the action message is shown in FIG.
 S2011:X_EPG_ChannelLineupアクションを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、図11(b)に示したような応答メッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置140に応答する。
  応答メッセージを受信したコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525は応答メッセージから、提供するEPGの編成チャンネルの数やテレビ放送チャンネルかラジオ放送チャンネルかの放送の種類、編成チャンネルのIDなどの情報を得る。
S2011: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the X_EPG_ChannelLineup action processes the message in the content directory service 425. Then, a response message as shown in FIG. 11B is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 140 is responded.
From the response message, the content directory controller 525 which has received the response message obtains information such as the number of organized channels of the EPG to be provided, the type of broadcast of a television broadcast channel or a radio broadcast channel, and the ID of the organized channel.
 S2012:番組情報受信装置140のコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の指示に従って、各編成チャンネルで提供する番組情報を取得するためにX_EPG_Programアクションを送信する。このとき、入力引数ObjectIDにはS2011で取得した編成チャンネルのIDである、チャンネルコンテナのid属性(図11(b)の1132)を用いる。 S2012: The content directory controller 525 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits an X_EPG_Program action in order to obtain program information to be provided on each organized channel according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501. At this time, as the input argument ObjectID, the id attribute (1132 in FIG. 11B) of the channel container, which is the ID of the organization channel acquired in S2011, is used.
 S2013:X_EPG_Programアクションを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、図18に示したような応答メッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置140に応答する。応答メッセージを受信したコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525は応答メッセージから、各番組のタイトル(イベント名)やジャンル、番組を識別するIDなどの情報を得る。 S2013: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the X_EPG_Program action processes the message in the content directory service 425. Then, it generates a response message as shown in FIG. 18 and responds to the program information receiving apparatus 140. The content directory controller 525 having received the response message obtains, from the response message, information such as the title (event name) and the genre of each program, and an ID for identifying the program.
 ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501はS1712、S1713の処理をEPGサーバが提供する全編成チャンネル分繰り返し、EPGサーバが提供する全番組の番組情報を取得し、メモリ213または記録再生部210に記録する。以上の手順で取得した番組情報を用いて取得番組表生成部510が番組表を生成する。ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501は生成した番組表をユーザに提示し、予約録画する番組を選択させる。 The network reservation recording application 501 repeats the processes of S 1712 and S 1713 for all the composition channels provided by the EPG server, acquires program information of all the programs provided by the EPG server, and records the program information in the memory 213 or the recording / reproducing unit 210. The acquired program guide generation unit 510 generates a program guide using the program information acquired by the above procedure. The network reservation recording application 501 presents the generated program guide to the user, and causes the user to select a program for reservation recording.
 なお、S1917で取得した情報コンテンツ一覧情報に複数のEPGのIDが含まれる場合はすべてのEPGの情報を取得するため図20のシーケンスを繰り返す。 図22は取得番組表生成部510が生成する電子番組表の一例である。
  電子番組表2200は放送種別欄2210、放送システム欄2211、番組表提供装置欄2212、放送日欄2213、チャンネル欄2216、時間欄2217と2218、番組欄2219で構成する。
If the information content list information acquired in S1917 includes the IDs of a plurality of EPGs, the sequence of FIG. 20 is repeated to acquire information of all the EPGs. FIG. 22 shows an example of the electronic program guide generated by the acquired program guide generator 510.
The electronic program guide 2200 includes a broadcast type field 2210, a broadcast system field 2211, a program schedule providing device field 2212, a broadcast date field 2213, a channel field 2216, time fields 2217 and 2218, and a program field 2219.
 放送種別欄2210は、テレビ放送やラジオ放送などの放送種別を表示する欄である。テレビ放送であるかラジオ放送であるかは、チャンネルコンテナのcatv:classプロパティで判断できる。テレビ放送の場合は”object.container.epgContainer.epgVideoChannel”、ラジオ放送の場合は”object.container.epgContainer.epgAudioChannel”と設定される。 The broadcast type field 2210 is a field for displaying a broadcast type such as television broadcast or radio broadcast. Whether it is a television broadcast or a radio broadcast can be determined by the catv: class property of the channel container. In the case of television broadcasting, “object.container.epgContainer.epgVideoChannel” is set, and in the case of radio broadcasting, “object.container.epgContainer.epgAudioChannel” is set.
 本実施例ではテレビ放送とラジオ放送の両方の放送が存在する場合は表示を別ける画面構成とした。ユーザはリモコンに割り当てられた放送切換えボタンなどでテレビ放送の電子番組表を表示するか、ラジオ放送の電子番組表を表示するかを切り替える。放送種別欄2210はテレビの電子番組表が選択されている様子を示している。このように、どちらが選択されているかを見た目で判断できる様に表示する。どちらか一方しかない場合は、その放送種別だけを表示する。 In the present embodiment, when both the television broadcast and the radio broadcast exist, the screen configuration is different from the display. The user switches whether to display a television broadcast electronic program guide or a radio broadcast electronic program guide using a broadcast switching button or the like assigned to the remote control. The broadcast type column 2210 shows that the electronic program guide of the television is selected. In this way, it is displayed so that it can be judged visually which one is selected. If there is only one, only the broadcast type is displayed.
 放送システム欄2211は、ケーブルテレビや地上デジタル放送など、表示している電子番組表の放送システムの名称を表す。放送システムの名称はEPGコンテナのdc:titleプロパティから取得する。2211は1つの放送システムの番組情報だけを取得した場合の例である。複数の放送システムに対する番組情報を取得した場合は放送種別欄2210と同様に、ユーザが放送システムを選択して表示を切り替えられる様に構成する。 The broadcast system column 2211 represents the name of a broadcast system of an electronic program guide being displayed, such as cable television or digital terrestrial broadcasting. The broadcast system name is acquired from the dc: title property of the EPG container. 2211 is an example in the case of acquiring only program information of one broadcast system. When program information for a plurality of broadcast systems is acquired, as in the case of the broadcast type column 2210, the user can select the broadcast system and switch the display.
 番組表提供装置欄2212は番組情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110の名前である。
番組情報送信装置110の名前は、例えば、機器記述情報600のデバイス情報610に含まれる機器の名称を表示する。番組情報の提供元の名前を示すことで、ユーザにネットワーク経由で取得した番組情報であることを明示的に知らせる事が出来る。
The program guide providing device column 2212 is the name of the program information transmitting device 110 which provided the program information.
The name of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 displays, for example, the name of the device included in the device information 610 of the device description information 600. By indicating the name of the provider of the program information, it is possible to explicitly inform the user that the program information is obtained via the network.
 放送日欄2213は番組情報が提供する放送日を表示する欄で、当日から所定の日数分選択できるようにする。選択方法や表示形式は放送種別欄2210と同様である。 The broadcast date column 2213 is a column for displaying the broadcast date provided by the program information, so that it can be selected for a predetermined number of days from the current day. The selection method and display format are the same as in the broadcast type column 2210.
 チャンネル欄2216は放送システムで提供されるチャンネルの一覧を提示する欄である。各チャンネル欄の列の下に、そのチャンネルで放送される番組の番組情報が配置される。チャンネル一覧の情報は前述したようにX_EPG_ChannelLineupアクションを用いて取得する。
  1つのチャンネルのチャンネル欄2220はチャンネル名欄2221、アイコン欄2222、チャンネル番号欄2223で構成する。チャンネル欄2220には、そのチャンネルのチャンネルコンテナのupnp:channelNameプロパティから取得した編成チャンネル名を表示する。アイコン欄2222には、チャンネルコンテナのupnp:iconプロパティで取得した編成チャンネルのロゴを表示する。ロゴのサイズはupnp:icon@arib:resolutionプロパティから取得する。チャンネルコンテナがupnp:iconプロパティを持たない場合はチャンネル番号欄2223を表示しない。
The channel column 2216 is a column that presents a list of channels provided by the broadcast system. Below the column of each channel column, program information of programs broadcasted on that channel is arranged. Channel list information is acquired using the X_EPG_ChannelLineup action as described above.
The channel field 2220 of one channel is composed of a channel name field 2221, an icon field 2222, and a channel number field 2223. The channel column 2220 displays the organized channel name acquired from the upnp: channelName property of the channel container of the channel. The icon column 2222 displays the organization channel logo acquired in the upnp: icon property of the channel container. The size of the logo is obtained from the upnp: icon @ arib: resolution property. If the channel container does not have the upnp: icon property, the channel number column 2223 is not displayed.
 時間欄2217、2218は放送時を表示する欄である。電子番組表を表示するときは、表示時の時間を一番上に配置する。表示時間帯は一般的な電子番組表と同様にユーザのリモコン操作などで移動できる。本実施例では時間欄は電子番組表の両脇に1つずつ配置しているが、画面の大きさなどによっては1つまたは3つ以上配置してもよい。 Time columns 2217 and 2218 are columns for displaying the time of broadcast. When displaying the electronic program guide, the display time is arranged at the top. The display time zone can be moved by the user's remote control operation or the like as in a general electronic program guide. In this embodiment, one time column is arranged on each side of the electronic program guide, but one or three or more time columns may be arranged depending on the size of the screen.
 番組欄2219は各番組の番組情報である各番組欄2230を表示する欄である。図に示すように各番組欄2230は番組欄2219に格子状に配置する。各番組欄2230はその番組が放送されるチャンネルのチャンネル欄の列に配置する。縦軸の位置は、番組開始時刻で定まる。例えば1時間の欄を15分単位で4分割して、0分から15分(15分は含まない)までの開始は4分割の一番上の位置、15分から30分(30分は含まない)までの開始は4分割の上から2番目の位置に配置する。 The program column 2219 is a column for displaying each program column 2230 which is program information of each program. As shown in the figure, each program column 2230 is arranged in a lattice form in the program column 2219. Each program column 2230 is arranged in the column of the channel column of the channel on which the program is broadcasted. The position of the vertical axis is determined by the program start time. For example, 1 hour column is divided into 4 by 15 minutes, and the start from 0 minutes to 15 minutes (not including 15 minutes) is the top position of 4 divisions, 15 minutes to 30 minutes (does not include 30 minutes) The start of the process is placed at the second position from the top of the four divisions.
 番組開始時刻は、番組アイテムのupnp:scheduledStartTimeプロパティから取得する。upnp:scheduledStartTimeプロパティが存在しない場合、該当番組の各番組欄2230は表示しない。
  各番組欄2230の時間方向の長さ2234は、番組アイテムのプロパティ情報として番組終了時刻を示すupnp:scheduledEndTimeプロパティ、もしくは、番組の時間の長さを表すres@durationプロパティのどちらかを用いて算出する。例えば、番組の時間の長さが2時間の場合は1時間の欄の長さ2つ分を、30分なら1時間の欄の長さの半分を割当てる。
The program start time is obtained from the program item's upnp: scheduledStartTime property. If the upnp: scheduledStartTime property does not exist, each program column 2230 of the corresponding program is not displayed.
The length 2234 in the time direction of each program column 2230 is calculated using either the upnp: scheduledEndTime property indicating the program end time as the property information of the program item, or the res @ duration property indicating the length of time of the program Do. For example, in the case where the length of time of the program is 2 hours, two minutes of the 1 hour column length are allocated, and in the case of 30 minutes, half of the 1 hour column length is allocated.
 upnp:scheduledEndTimeプロパティもres@durationプロパティも提供されない場合は、次の番組の番組開始時刻まで時間方向の長さ2234をとる。 If neither the upnp: scheduledEndTime nor res @ duration properties are provided, the length in the time direction 2234 is taken until the program start time of the next program.
 各番組欄2230は、番組開始時刻表示欄2231、番組名表示欄2232、番組説明表示欄2233などで構成する。
  番組開始時刻表示欄2231には、”15”などのように番組開始時刻の分の値をする。時間の値は各番組欄2230の縦軸の位置で判断できるため番組開始時刻表示欄2231には表示しない。番組開始時刻は、upnp:scheduledStartTimeプロパティから取得する。
  番組名表示欄2232には、番組アイテムのdc:titleプロパティから取得した番組名を表示する。
  番組説明表示欄2233には、番組アイテムのdc:descriptionプロパティから取得した番組記述を表示する。
  番組名表示欄2232、番組説明表示欄2233ともに、取得した情報の文字数が表示可能な文字数より多い場合は、表示可能な文字数までの情報を表示する。
  各番組欄2230には、番組コンテンツか有料であることを示すアイコンなどを表示してもよい。番組が有料か無料かは番組アイテムのarib:caProgramInfoプロパティで取得できる。また、ドラマ、スポーツなど番組のジャンル別に番組名表示欄2232の背景の色を設定し、より番組を選択しやすい表示にしてもよい。番組のジャンル情報は、番組アイテムのupnp:genreプロパティから取得できる。
Each program column 2230 includes a program start time display column 2231, a program name display column 2232, a program description display column 2233, and the like.
In the program start time display column 2231, the value of the program start time is set, such as "15". The value of time can not be displayed in the program start time display column 2231 because it can be determined by the position of the vertical axis of each program column 2230. The program start time is acquired from the upnp: scheduledStartTime property.
The program title display column 2232 displays the program title acquired from the dc: title property of the program item.
The program description display column 2233 displays a program description acquired from the dc: description property of the program item.
When the number of characters of the acquired information is larger than the number of characters that can be displayed, the program name display column 2232 and the program description display column 2233 display information up to the number of characters that can be displayed.
Each program column 2230 may display an icon or the like indicating that the program content is paid. Whether the program is paid or free can be obtained from the program item's arib: caProgramInfo property. In addition, the background color of the program name display column 2232 may be set according to the genre of the program such as drama and sports to make it easier to select a program. The genre information of the program can be acquired from the upnp: genre property of the program item.
 なお、図22で示した電子番組表2200の構成は一例である。時間欄2217とチャンネル欄2216の配置を入れ替えても良いし、一つのチャンネルについて所定の日数分の番組情報を表示する構成をとっても良い。 The configuration of the electronic program guide 2200 shown in FIG. 22 is an example. The arrangement of the time column 2217 and the channel column 2216 may be interchanged, or program information for a predetermined number of days may be displayed for one channel.
 以上のように、取得番組表生成部510は番組情報送信装置110から取得した番組情報を用いて、電子番組表を生成する。 As described above, the acquired program guide generation unit 510 generates the electronic program guide using the program information acquired from the program information transmission apparatus 110.
 図21はユーザが先約した予約録画を番組情報送信装置110に設定する手順である。番組情報受信装置140における予約録画設定処理はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501によって予約録画シーケンスとして実行される。 FIG. 21 shows the procedure of setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110. The scheduled recording setting process in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network scheduled recording application 501 as a scheduled recording sequence.
 S2110:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の指示に従って、ユーザが選択した番組の予約録画を設定する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを送信する。メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージの引数は予約する番組の情報を記述した「予約情報」である。本実施例では、番組情報送信装置110がEpgダイレクト予約録画機能を提供するため、番組アイテムのタイトルとIDプロパティだけで予約設定できる。 S2110: The scheduled recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “scheduled recording object creation request” message for setting the scheduled recording of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501. The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user. An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information” which describes information of a program to be reserved. In this embodiment, since the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the Epg direct reserved recording function, reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
 S2111:「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約管理部414を参照し、予約の重複がなければ、その番組予約を予約管理部414に設定する。予約を受け付た場合は、予約録画を参照するための識別子である予約IDと、予約結果の情報であるResultを返す。 S2111: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429. The reservation management unit 414 is referred to, and if there is no duplication of reservation, the program reservation is set in the reservation management unit 414. When the reservation is received, a reservation ID which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording and a result which is information of the reservation result are returned.
 図24にEpgダイレクト予約録画を行う場合の「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求メッセージと応答メッセージの一例を示す。 FIG. 24 shows an example of a request message and a response message of the “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing the Epg direct reservation recording.
 「Request」は要求メッセージである。
  2410は、要求メッセージに与える引数「予約情報」を記述したXMLドキュメントである。
  2411は、XMLヘッダ、2412は引数「予約情報」の値を表すitemオブジェクトである。
  item id(属性id)は、予約録画を一意に特定する予約IDである。属性idは番組情報送信装置110が設定するため、予約録画を要求する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求メッセージには値を指定しない。
  <title>タグ2413は、予約録画する番組の番組名である。ユーザが電子番組表2200から選択した番組の番組アイテムのdc:titleプロパティの値を設定する。
  <class>タグ2414は、itemオブジェクト2412の分類を示す。
  2414の”object.recordschedule.direct.cdsepg”は、Epgダイレクト予約録画を設定するitemオブジェクトであることを表す。
  <scheduledCDSObjectID>タグ2415には、番組情報を提供したEPGサーバが予約録画する番組を特定するためのIDを設定する。よって、ユーザが選択した番組の番組アイテムの属性idを設定する。
"Request" is a request message.
Reference numeral 2410 denotes an XML document in which an argument “reservation information” to be given to the request message is described.
2411 is an XML header, and 2412 is an item object representing the value of the argument “reservation information”.
The item id (attribute id) is a reservation ID that uniquely identifies a scheduled recording. Since the attribute id is set by the program information transmitting apparatus 110, no value is designated in the request message of the "scheduled recording object creation request" action for requesting scheduled recording.
The <title> tag 2413 is a program name of a program to be reserved and recorded. The value of the dc: title property of the program item of the program selected by the user from the electronic program guide 2200 is set.
The <class> tag 2414 indicates the classification of the item object 2412.
“Object.recordschedule.direct.cdsepg” of 2414 represents that it is an item object for setting the Epg direct reservation recording.
In the <scheduledCDSObjectID> tag 2415, an ID for specifying a program to be scheduled and recorded by the EPG server that has provided the program information is set. Therefore, the attribute id of the program item of the program selected by the user is set.
 「Response」は応答メッセージである。
  2420は、出力引数「予約ID」であり、予約録画を一意に特定するIDが設定される。この予約IDは設定した予約録画を削除する場合などに用いられる。
  2430は、予約結果の情報である「Result」を記述したXMLドキュメントである。
  2431は、XMLヘッダ、2432は「Result」の値を表すitemオブジェクトである。
  属性idは、予約録画を一意に特定する予約IDは設定される。この値は2420に設定された値と等しい。
  <title>タグ2433は2413と、<class>タグ2434は2414と、<scheduledCDSObjectID>タグ2435は2415と同じである。
  <mediaRemainAlertID>タグ2436は、予約録画を設定された番組情報送信装置110が指定された予約録画を実行する際に、メディアの残量不足の警告を知らせるものである。一例として、値”0”は残量不足の恐れがないことを表し、値”1”は残量不足のため録画できない可能性があることを示す。
"Response" is a response message.
An output argument “reservation ID” 2420 is set to an ID uniquely identifying a reservation recording. This reservation ID is used, for example, when deleting the set scheduled recording.
2430 is an XML document which describes "Result" which is information of reservation result.
2431 is an XML header, and 2432 is an item object representing the value of "Result".
As the attribute id, a reservation ID for uniquely identifying a reserved recording is set. This value is equal to the value set in 2420.
The <title> tag 2433 is the same as 2413, the <class> tag 2434 is the 2414, and the <scheduledCDSObjectID> tag 2435 is the same as 2415.
The <mediaRemainAlertID> tag 2436 is used to notify of a warning about the remaining amount of medium when the program information transmitting apparatus 110 for which scheduled recording has been set executes scheduled recording. As an example, the value “0” indicates that there is no fear of the remaining amount being insufficient, and the value “1” indicates that recording may not be possible because the remaining amount is insufficient.
 図25(a)は、Epgダイレクトではない標準予約録画を行う場合の「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求メッセージと応答メッセージの一例を示したものである。EPGサーバ機能のみ提供し、Epgダイレクト予約録画を提供しない番組情報送信装置の場合はこの書式で設定する。 FIG. 25A shows an example of the request message and the response message of the “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing standard reservation recording that is not Epg Direct. In the case of a program information transmitting apparatus which provides only the EPG server function and does not provide the Epg direct reservation recording, the setting is made in this format.
 「Request」は要求メッセージである。
  2510は、要求メッセージに与える引数「予約情報」を記述したXMLドキュメントである。
  2511は、XMLヘッダ、2512は引数「予約情報」の値を表すitemオブジェクトである。
  属性idは、予約録画を一意に特定する予約IDである。属性idは番組情報送信装置110が設定するため、予約録画を要求する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求メッセージには値を指定しない。
  <title>タグ2513は2413と同じである。
  <class>タグ2514には、Epgダイレクトではない標準予約録画であることを表す”object.recordschedule.direct.cdsNonepg”を設定する。要求するのはEpgダイレクトではない標準録画であるので<scheduledCDSObjectID>タグは無く、チャンネル番号と、番組開始時刻、番組時間の長さで予約録画する番組を指定する。
"Request" is a request message.
An XML document 2510 describes an argument “reservation information” to be provided to the request message.
Reference numeral 2511 denotes an XML header, and reference numeral 2512 denotes an item object representing the value of the argument “reservation information”.
The attribute id is a reservation ID that uniquely identifies a scheduled recording. Since the attribute id is set by the program information transmitting apparatus 110, no value is designated in the request message of the "scheduled recording object creation request" action for requesting scheduled recording.
The <title> tag 2513 is the same as 2413.
In the <class> tag 2514, “object.recordschedule.direct.cdsNonepg” is set to indicate that the recording is a standard reservation recording that is not Epg Direct. There is no <scheduledCDSObjectID> tag because what is requested is standard recording that is not Epg Direct, and a program to be scheduled and recorded is specified by the channel number, the program start time, and the program duration.
 <scheduledChannelID>タグ2515、はユーザが選択した番組のチャンネル番号を指定し、番組アイテムのupnp:channelNrプロパティを設定する。
  <scheduledStartDateTime>タグ2516は、番組開始時刻であり、番組アイテムのupnp:scheduledStartTimeプロパティを設定する。
  <scheduledDuration>タグ2517は、番組時間の長さであり、番組アイテムのres@durationプロパティを設定する。
The <scheduledChannelID> tag 2515 designates the channel number of the program selected by the user, and sets the upnp: channelNr property of the program item.
The <scheduledStartDateTime> tag 2516 is a program start time, and sets upnp: scheduledStartTime property of the program item.
The <scheduledDuration> tag 2517 is a length of a program time, and sets a res @ duration property of a program item.
 「Response」の構成は、図24の「Response」と同じ構成なので説明を省略する。<class>タグの値が”object.recordschedule.direct.cdsNonepg”である点だけが異なる。 The configuration of “Response” is the same as that of “Response” in FIG. The only difference is that the value of the <class> tag is "object.recordschedule.direct.cdsNonepg".
 図25(b)は標準予約録画の引数「予約情報」の他の書式である。res@durationプロパティが提供されていない場合にこの書式を用いる。図25(b)では<scheduledDuration>タグ2517ではなく、番組終了時刻を設定する。<scheduledEndDateTime>タグ2518に番組アイテムのupnp:scheduledEndTimeプロパティを設定する。 FIG. 25 (b) shows another format of the argument "reservation information" of the standard reservation recording. Use this format if the res @ duration property is not provided. In FIG. 25B, the program end time is set instead of the <scheduledDuration> tag 2517. In the <scheduledEndDateTime> tag 2518, the upnp: scheduledEndTime property of the program item is set.
 以上のように、本実施例に係る番組情報送信装置110は、ネットワーク上の他の機器にEPG情報を提供し、そのEPG情報から得た番組情報を用いて番組情報送信装置110に予約録画を設定するインターフェースを提供する。
また、本実施例に係るEPGクライアント搭載機器である番組情報受信装置140は、ネットワークに接続されたEPGサーバ搭載機器である番組情報送信装置110を探索し、EPG情報を取得し、その情報から電子番組表画面を生成しユーザに提示する。そして、提示された番組を選択して予約録画する手段をユーザに与える。そのため、ユーザは操作している機器へ予約録画を設定する場合と同じ感覚で、ネットワーク経由で番組情報送信装置110に予約録画を設定できる。 なお、本発明は上記した実施例に限定されるものではなく、様々な変形例が含まれる。例えば、上記した実施例は本発明を分かりやすく説明するために詳細に説明したものであり、必ずしも説明した全ての構成を備えるものに限定されるものではない。また、ある実施例の構成の一部を他の実施例の構成に置き換えることが可能であり、また、ある実施例の構成に他の実施例の構成を加えることも可能である。また、各実施例の構成の一部について、他の構成の追加・削除・置換をすることが可能である。
As described above, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the present embodiment provides the EPG information to other devices on the network, and uses the program information obtained from the EPG information to make a reservation recording in the program information transmitting apparatus 110. Provide an interface to configure.
Further, the program information receiving apparatus 140 which is an EPG client mounted apparatus according to the present embodiment searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which is an EPG server mounted apparatus connected to a network, acquires EPG information, and obtains electronic information from the information. Generate a program guide screen and present it to the user. Then, the user is provided with means for selecting the presented program and performing scheduled recording. Therefore, the user can set the scheduled recording on the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network in the same way as setting the scheduled recording on the device being operated. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, but includes various modifications. For example, the embodiments described above are described in detail in order to explain the present invention in an easy-to-understand manner, and are not necessarily limited to those having all the configurations described. Also, part of the configuration of one embodiment can be replaced with the configuration of another embodiment, and the configuration of another embodiment can be added to the configuration of one embodiment. In addition, with respect to a part of the configuration of each embodiment, it is possible to add, delete, and replace other configurations.
 本実施例では、番組情報受信装置がユーザのリモコンなど操作装置230を操作してネットワークで接続された番組情報送信装置から番組情報を取得して、電子番組表を生成しユーザに提示する方式について説明する。 In the present embodiment, a method in which a program information receiving apparatus operates the operation device 230 such as a user's remote control to acquire program information from a program information transmitting apparatus connected via a network, generates an electronic program guide and presents it to the user. explain.
 番組情報送信装置110、番組情報受信装置140の構成は各々図2、図3に示した例と同じである。また、番組情報送信装置110のソフトウェア構成も図4と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, respectively. Further, the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is also the same as that shown in FIG.
 図26は本実施例に係る番組情報受信装置140のソフトウェア構成図である。図26において図5と同一または相当部分は同一符号で示し、説明を省略する。 FIG. 26 is a software block diagram of the program information receiving apparatus 140 according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 26, the same or corresponding parts as those in FIG.
 番組情報受信装置140の機能を実現する制御ソフトウェア2600は番組情報受信装置140のメモリ213に展開され制御部211で実行される。 Control software 2600 for realizing the functions of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is expanded in the memory 213 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 and executed by the control unit 211.
 図26では図5で示した番組情報受信装置140のソフトウェア構成に対して、統合番組表生成アプリ2610を追加したものである。 26, an integrated program guide generation application 2610 is added to the software configuration of the program information receiving apparatus 140 shown in FIG.
 統合番組表生成アプリ2610は番組表生成部410が生成する番組情報受信装置140自身が受信する放送システムの電子番組表と、番組情報送信装置110から取得し取得番組表生成部510で生成した電子番組表とを、ユーザが電子番組表情報の提供元の違いを意識することなく選択できるようにするアプリケーションである。 The integrated program guide generation application 2610 is an electronic program guide of a broadcast system received by the program information reception apparatus 140 itself generated by the program guide generation unit 410, and an electronic program acquired from the program information transmission apparatus 110 and generated by the acquired program guide generation unit 510. It is an application that allows the user to select a program guide without being aware of the difference in the provider of the electronic program guide information.
 ネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611は、先に説明した図5のネットワーク予約録画アプリ501と同様に、ホームネットワーク上の他の機器へ録画予約を行うネットワーク経由の予約録画機能をユーザに提供するアプリケーションである。ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501ではEPGサーバ探索する処理やEPG情報取得する処理も担っていたが、本実施例においてはこれらの処理は統合番組表生成アプリ2610が担う。ネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611は統合番組表生成アプリ2610からの要求に従って、ユーザが選択した番組の予約録画を番組情報送信装置110に設定する処理を担う。 The network reservation recording application 2611 is an application for providing the user with a reservation recording function via the network for performing recording reservation to another device on the home network, as in the network reservation recording application 501 of FIG. 5 described above. The network reservation recording application 501 is also responsible for the process of searching for an EPG server and the process of acquiring EPG information, but in the present embodiment, the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is responsible for these processes. The network reservation recording application 2611 is responsible for setting the reservation recording of the program selected by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 in accordance with the request from the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
 アプリ管理部450、統合番組表生成アプリ2610、及び、ネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611は制御ソフトウェア500を構成する各ソフトウェアブロックと制御やデータ参照などの関係を持つが、図が煩雑になるため他のソフトウェアブロックに対する関係線は省略する。 The application management unit 450, the integrated program guide generation application 2610, and the network reservation recording application 2611 have a relationship such as control or data reference with each software block constituting the control software 500, but other software may become complicated. The relation line to the block is omitted.
 図27は統合番組表生成アプリ2610が生成する電子番組表の一例である。図27において図22と同一または相当部分は同一符号で示し、説明を省略する。 FIG. 27 shows an example of an electronic program guide generated by the integrated program guide generation application 2610. In FIG. 27, the same or corresponding parts as in FIG.
 統合番組表生成アプリ2610が生成する電子番組表2700では図22の電子番組表に対して統合EPG欄2701を追加する。 In the electronic program guide 2700 generated by the integrated program guide generation application 2610, an integrated EPG field 2701 is added to the electronic program guide of FIG.
 統合EPG欄2701は利用できるEPGの種類をユーザに提示する。図27では番組情報受信装置140自身が受信できる放送システムの電子番組表である「本体EPG」として地上デジタル放送とBSデジタル放送と、ネットワークを介して番組情報を取得して生成する電子番組表である「ネットEPG」を利用できることをアイコンでユーザに提示している。2702は「ネットEPG」を利用できること示すネットEPGアイコンである。表示する電子番組表はユーザが操作装置230を操作し指示することで選択される。なお、本実施例においては「本体EPG」を「EPG」と記載する場合もある。 The integrated EPG field 2701 presents the user with the types of available EPGs. In FIG. 27, it is an electronic program guide which acquires and generates program information via terrestrial digital broadcast and BS digital broadcast as a "main body EPG" which is an electronic program guide of a broadcast system which the program information receiving apparatus 140 itself can receive. An icon indicates to the user that a certain "net EPG" can be used. Reference numeral 2702 denotes a net EPG icon indicating that "net EPG" can be used. The electronic program guide to be displayed is selected by the user operating and instructing the operation device 230. In the present embodiment, "main body EPG" may be described as "EPG".
 図30は操作装置230の一例である。3001は電子番組表を表示させる番組表ボタンである。表示中に番組表ボタン3001が押下された場合、電子番組表は非表示になる。3002は決定ボタンである。予約録画番組の決定する場合などに用いる。3003は戻るボタンである。操作をキャンセルし前の操作画面に戻る場合などに用いる。3004、3005、3006、3007は操作画面上のカーソル位置の移動などに用いるカーソル操作ボタンである。3004は上ボタン、3005は下ボタン、3006は左ボタン、3007は右ボタンである。3008は電子番組表の表示日を選択する日にちボタンである。例えば、上側(△)で前日、下側(▽)で翌日に電子番組表の表示を切替える。3009は電子番組表の表示時間帯を選択するページボタンである。例えば、上側(△)で前の時間帯、下側(▽)で後の時間帯に電子番組表の表示を切替える。地デジボタン3011、BSボタン3012は放送システムを選択するボタンである。ネットEPGを選択するネットEPGボタン3013はネットEPGを選択するボタンである。 FIG. 30 shows an example of the operating device 230. Reference numeral 3001 denotes a program guide button for displaying an electronic program guide. If the program guide button 3001 is pressed during display, the electronic program guide is hidden. 3002 is a determination button. It is used, for example, when deciding on a scheduled recording program. 3003 is a back button. It is used to cancel the operation and return to the previous operation screen. Reference numerals 3004, 3005, 3006, and 3007 denote cursor operation buttons used to move the cursor position on the operation screen. 3004 is an upper button, 3005 is a lower button, 3006 is a left button, and 3007 is a right button. A date button 3008 is used to select the display date of the electronic program guide. For example, the display of the electronic program guide is switched on the previous day in the upper side (△) and the next day in the lower side (▽). Reference numeral 3009 denotes a page button for selecting a display time zone of the electronic program guide. For example, the display of the electronic program guide is switched to the previous time zone on the upper side (△) and the later time zone on the lower side (▽). A terrestrial digital button 3011 and a BS button 3012 are buttons for selecting a broadcasting system. A net EPG button 3013 for selecting a net EPG is a button for selecting a net EPG.
 次に、統合番組表生成アプリ2610の動作について説明する。
  はじめに、統合番組表生成アプリ2610の起動処理について説明する。
  起動処理はアプリ管理部450からの起動要求をトリガに開始される。アプリ管理部450は操作装置230の操作ボタンの押下を監視し、番組表ボタン3001、または、ネットEPGボタン3013の押下を検知すると統合番組表生成アプリ2610の起動要求を発行する。このとき、押下されたボタンに応じて統合番組表生成アプリ2610の起動モードを設定する。番組表ボタン3001が押下された場合は起動モードを「EPGモード」に、ネットEPGボタン3013が押下された場合は起動モードを「ネットEPGモード」に設定する。「EPGモード」とは、番組情報受信装置140が受信する放送システムの電子番組表である「本体EPG」を表示するモードである。「ネットEPGモード」とは、番組情報送信装置110から取得した番組情報を用いて生成した電子番組表である「ネットEPG」表示するモードである。
Next, the operation of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 will be described.
First, start processing of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 will be described.
The activation process is triggered by an activation request from the application management unit 450. The application management unit 450 monitors pressing of the operation button of the operation device 230, and when it detects pressing of the program guide button 3001 or the net EPG button 3013, issues an activation request for the integrated program guide generation application 2610. At this time, the start mode of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is set in accordance with the pressed button. When the program guide button 3001 is pressed, the start mode is set to "EPG mode", and when the net EPG button 3013 is pressed, the start mode is set to "net EPG mode". The “EPG mode” is a mode for displaying a “main body EPG” which is an electronic program guide of a broadcast system received by the program information receiving apparatus 140. The “net EPG mode” is a mode for displaying “net EPG” which is an electronic program guide generated using the program information acquired from the program information transmission apparatus 110.
 図28は統合番組表生成アプリ2610の起動処理フローである。
  S2801:はじめに統合番組表生成アプリ2610は、ホームネットワーク上のEPGサーバを探索する。EPGサーバ探索は、図19で説明したEPGサーバ探索シーケンスと同じ処理である。EPGサーバ探索により、ホームネットワーク上のEPGサーバ数、各EPGサーバのEPGサーバ情報を取得する。
FIG. 28 shows the start processing flow of the integrated program guide generation application 2610.
S2801: Introduction The integrated program guide generation application 2610 searches for an EPG server on the home network. The EPG server search is the same process as the EPG server search sequence described in FIG. By EPG server search, the number of EPG servers on the home network and EPG server information of each EPG server are acquired.
 S2802:次に、起動モードとEPGサーバ数で生成する電子番組表を決定する。起動モードが「ネットEPGモード」、且つ、EPGサーバ数が1以上の場合は、統合番組表生成アプリ2610の動作状態を、ネットEPGを生成する「ネットEPG生成」に遷移し起動処理フローを終了する(S2803)。その他の場合は、統合番組表生成アプリ2610の動作状態を、本体EPGを生成する「EPG生成」に遷移し起動処理フローを終了する(S2804)。すなわち、ネットEPGボタン3013が押下された場合であっても、ホームネットワーク上にEPGサーバが存在しない場合は本体EPGを生成する。 S2802: Next, the electronic program guide to be generated is determined by the start mode and the number of EPG servers. When the start mode is "net EPG mode" and the number of EPG servers is one or more, the operation state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is transitioned to "net EPG generation" for generating a net EPG, and the start processing flow is ended. (S2803). In other cases, the operation state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is transited to “EPG generation” for generating the main body EPG, and the start processing flow is ended (S2804). That is, even when the net EPG button 3013 is pressed, the main body EPG is generated when there is no EPG server on the home network.
 図29は統合番組表生成アプリ2610によるEPG生成処理フローである。EPG生成処理フローは動作状態が「EPG生成」または「ネットEPG生成」の場合に実行される。 FIG. 29 is an EPG generation processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610. The EPG generation processing flow is executed when the operation state is "EPG generation" or "net EPG generation".
 S2901:統合番組表生成アプリ2610は自身の動作状態を確認する。「EPG生成」の場合はS2902の処理に分岐する。「ネットEPG生成」の場合はS2904の処理に分岐する。 S2901: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 confirms its own operation state. In the case of "EPG generation", the process branches to the process of S2902. In the case of "net EPG generation", the process branches to the process of S2904.
 S2902:統合番組表生成アプリ2610は番組表生成部410へ番組表の生成を要求して、S2903へ遷移する。 S2902: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 requests the program guide generation unit 410 to generate a program guide, and transitions to S2903.
 S2903:統合番組表生成アプリ2610は自身の動作状態を、EPGを表示する「EPG表示」に遷移しEPG生成処理フローを終了する。 S2903: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 changes its operation state to "EPG display" for displaying the EPG, and ends the EPG generation processing flow.
 S2904:統合番組表生成アプリ2610はメモリ213を参照し、EPGサーバの数を確認する。EPGサーバの数は、先に図28で説明した起動処理フローで取得したものである。EPGサーバの数>1、すなわちホームネットワーク上に複数のEPGサーバが存在する場合はS2905へ遷移する。その他の場合は、S2906へ遷移する。 S2904: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 refers to the memory 213 and confirms the number of EPG servers. The number of EPG servers is obtained by the activation process flow described above with reference to FIG. If the number of EPG servers> 1, ie, there are multiple EPG servers on the home network, the process proceeds to step S2905. In other cases, the process transitions to S2906.
 S2905:EPGサーバの機器の名称などを提示するUI(User Interface)画面を表示し、ユーザに電子番組表を表示するEPGサーバを選択させる。 S2905: A UI (User Interface) screen for presenting the name of the device of the EPG server and the like is displayed, and the user is allowed to select an EPG server for displaying the electronic program guide.
 S2906:統合番組表生成アプリ2610はコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525へ、EPGサーバからの番組情報取得を要求する。コンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525は図20に示したEPG情報取得シーケンスで番組情報を取得する。ホームネットワーク上にEPGサーバが複数存在する場合はS2906でユーザが選択したEPGサーバからの番組情報取得を要求する。 S2906: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 requests the content directory controller 525 to acquire program information from the EPG server. The content directory controller 525 acquires program information in the EPG information acquisition sequence shown in FIG. If there are a plurality of EPG servers on the home network, program information acquisition from the EPG server selected by the user is requested in S2906.
 S2907:統合番組表生成アプリ2610は取得番組表生成部510へ番組表の生成を要求して、S2908へ遷移する。 S2907: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 requests the acquired program guide generation unit 510 to generate a program guide, and the process transitions to S2908.
 S2908:統合番組表生成アプリ2610は自身の動作状態を、ネットEPGを表示する「ネットEPG表示」に遷移しEPG生成処理フローを終了する。 S2908: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 changes its operation state to "NET EPG display" for displaying the net EPG, and ends the EPG generation processing flow.
 図31は統合番組表生成アプリ2610によるEPG表示処理フローである。EPG表示処理フローは動作状態が「EPG表示」または「ネットEPG表示」の場合に実行される。 FIG. 31 is an EPG display processing flow by the integrated program guide generation application 2610. The EPG display processing flow is executed when the operation state is "EPG display" or "net EPG display".
 S3101:統合番組表生成アプリ2610はメモリ213に記憶されたEPGサーバ数を参照し統合EPG欄2701の表示状態を定める。EPGサーバ数が0、すなわちホームネットワーク上にEPGサーバが存在しない場合は、統合EPG欄2701のネットEPGアイコン2702をグレイアウトし、ネットEPGを利用できないことをユーザに示す(S3102)。EPGサーバ数が0でない場合は、ネットEPGアイコン2702を表示しネットEPGを利用できることをユーザに示す(S3103)。 S3101: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 refers to the number of EPG servers stored in the memory 213 to determine the display state of the integrated EPG column 2701. If the number of EPG servers is 0, that is, there is no EPG server on the home network, the net EPG icon 2702 in the integrated EPG column 2701 is grayed out to indicate to the user that the net EPG can not be used (S3102). If the number of EPG servers is not 0, the net EPG icon 2702 is displayed to indicate to the user that the net EPG can be used (S3103).
 S3104:次に、統合番組表生成アプリ2610の状態に応じて表示する電子番組表を定める。状態が「EPG表示」の場合はS3105へ遷移し本体EPG表示処理を行う。状態が「ネットEPG表示」の場合はS3107へ遷移しネットEPG表示処理を行う。 S3104: Next, an electronic program guide to be displayed is determined according to the state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610. When the state is "EPG display", the process transitions to S3105 to perform main body EPG display processing. If the state is "display of net EPG", the process transitions to step S3107 to perform net EPG display processing.
 S3105:統合番組表生成アプリ2610は番組表生成部410が生成した本体EPGを表示させる。このとき、本体EPGの層よりも統合EPG欄2701の層のほうが上の層になるように表示する。 S3105: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 displays the main body EPG generated by the program guide generation unit 410. At this time, the layer of the integrated EPG field 2701 is displayed as the upper layer rather than the layer of the main EPG.
 S3106:そして、統合番組表生成アプリ2610は自身の状態を「EPG表示中」に遷移させEPG表示処理フローを終了する。 S3106: Then, the integrated program guide generation application 2610 changes its state to “during EPG display” and ends the EPG display processing flow.
 S3107:統合番組表生成アプリ2610は取得番組表生成部510が生成したネットEPGを表示させる。このとき、ネットEPGの層よりも統合EPG欄2701の層のほうが上の層になるように表示する。 S3107: The integrated program guide generation application 2610 displays the net EPG generated by the acquired program guide generation unit 510. At this time, the layer of the integrated EPG field 2701 is displayed as the upper layer rather than the layer of the net EPG.
 S3108:そして、統合番組表生成アプリ2610は自身の状態を「ネットEPG表示中」に遷移させEPG表示処理フローを終了する。 S3108: Then, the integrated program guide generation application 2610 transits its state to "during net EPG display" and ends the EPG display processing flow.
 図32は統合番組表生成アプリ2610の状態遷移テーブルの一例である。図は、統合番組表生成アプリ2610の状態が「EPG表示中」または「ネットEPG表示中」あったときに、操作装置230からの入力、すなわち、ボタン押下によって遷移する状態を示している。3211はEPG表示中、3212はネットEPG表示中の状態を示す。3221、3222、3223、3224、3325、3226は操作装置230の押下ボタンを示す。スラッシュ(“/”)は“OR”を意味する。 FIG. 32 shows an example of the state transition table of the integrated program guide generation application 2610. The figure shows a state in which transition is made by an input from the operation device 230, that is, a button is pressed, when the state of the integrated program guide generation application 2610 is "during EPG display" or "during net EPG display". 3211 indicates a state in which the EPG is displayed, and 3212 indicates a state in which the net EPG is displayed. Reference numerals 3221, 3222, 22323, 3224, 3325, and 3226 denote push buttons of the operating device 230. The slash ("/") means "OR".
 状態「EPG表示中」3211において、番組表ボタン、または、戻るボタンが押下された場合(3221)、統合番組表生成アプリ2610は表示中のEPGを非表示にし、統合番組表生成処理を終了する。ネットEPGボタンが押下された場合(3222)は状態を「ネットEPG生成」に遷移し図29で説明したEPG生成処理フローを実行する。地デジボタン、または、BSボタンが押下された場合(3223)は必要に応じてEPGの表示を切り替える。例えば、BSのEPG表示中にBSボタンが押下された場合は、現在のEPG表示を維持する。決定ボタンが押下された場合(3224)は、現在の時間の番組が選択された場合は、チューナ部201に選局を依頼し、表示中のEPGを非表示にして統合番組表生成処理を終了する。未来の番組が選択された場合は、予約設定管理部514へ予約処理を要求する。日にちボタンが押下された場合(3325)はEPG表示の表示日を前日あるいは翌日へ切替える。ページボタンが押下された場合(3326)はEPG表示の表示時間帯を前の時間帯、あるいは次の時間帯へ切替える。 When the program guide button or the back button is pressed in the state of “displaying EPG” 3211 (3221), the integrated program guide generation application 2610 hides the EPG being displayed, and ends the integrated program guide generation processing. . When the net EPG button is pressed (3222), the state is transited to "net EPG generation", and the EPG generation processing flow described in FIG. 29 is executed. When the terrestrial digital button or the BS button is pressed (3223), the display of the EPG is switched as necessary. For example, if the BS button is pressed during the EPG display of the BS, the current EPG display is maintained. When the determination button is pressed (3224), when a program of the current time is selected, the tuner unit 201 is requested to select a channel, the displayed EPG is hidden, and the integrated program guide generation process is ended. Do. When a future program is selected, the reservation setting management unit 514 is requested to perform reservation processing. When the date button is pressed (3325), the display date of the EPG display is switched to the previous day or the next day. When the page button is pressed (3326), the display time zone of the EPG display is switched to the previous time zone or the next time zone.
 状態「ネットEPG表示中」3212において、番組表ボタン、または、戻るボタンが押下された場合(3221)、統合番組表生成アプリ2610は表示中のEPGを非表示にし、統合番組表生成処理を終了する。ネットEPGボタンが押下された場合(3222)も同様に統合番組表生成処理を終了する。地デジボタン、または、BSボタンが押下された場合(3223)は状態を「EPG生成」に遷移し、図29で説明したEPG生成処理フローを実行する。決定ボタンが押下された場合(3224)は、ネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611にネットEPG表示中のEPGサーバに対し、選択された番組の予約録画を設定する録画予約要求を行う。ネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611は図21に示した予約録画シーケンスにより選択された番組を予約録画の設定を実行する。日にちボタンが押下された場合(3325)、ページボタンが押下された場合(3326)は表示する日にち及び時間帯の範囲を指定して「EPG生成」に遷移し、図29で説明したEPG生成処理フローを実行する。このとき、S2906でのコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525への番組情報取得要求に日にち及び時間帯の範囲を指定する。 When the program guide button or the back button is pressed in the state of "displaying net EPG" 3212 (3221), the integrated program guide generation application 2610 hides the EPG being displayed, and ends the integrated program guide generation processing. Do. Similarly, when the net EPG button is pressed (3222), the integrated program guide generation processing ends. When the terrestrial digital button or the BS button is pressed (3223), the state is transited to "EPG generation", and the EPG generation processing flow described in FIG. 29 is executed. When the determination button is pressed (3224), the network reservation recording application 2611 issues a recording reservation request for setting the reservation recording of the selected program to the EPG server currently displaying the net EPG. The network reservation recording application 2611 executes setting of reservation recording of a program selected by the reservation recording sequence shown in FIG. When the date button is pressed (3325), and when the page button is pressed (3326), the date and time range to be displayed are specified and transition is made to "EPG generation", and the EPG generation processing described in FIG. 29 is performed. Execute the flow At this time, the range of date and time zone is specified in the program information acquisition request to the content directory controller 525 in S2906.
 コンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525が番組情報取得要求に応じて、日にち及び時間帯の範囲を指定する場合の「X_EPG_Program」アクション751要求の一例を図33に示す。3301に示すように第2引数に条件を記述する。3301では条件として番組の開始時刻の時間範囲を設定している。3301ように設定することで、EPGサーバが提供する番組情報の中から指定した条件を満たす番組の番組情報だけを取得できる。 An example of the “X_EPG_Program” action 751 request in the case where the content directory controller 525 designates the range of the date and time zone in response to the program information acquisition request is shown in FIG. Describe the condition in the second argument as shown in 3301. In 3301, the time range of the start time of the program is set as the condition. By setting as in 3301, it is possible to acquire only program information of a program that satisfies the specified condition from program information provided by the EPG server.
 なお、日にちボタンや、ページボタンが押下されたときのような表示条件が指定される場合以外においても日時の範囲を設定しても良い。例えば、電子番組表の一画面に表示可能な時間分だけの番組情報を取得するよう条件を指定した場合、伝送される情報量が少なくなるので、ネットEPG表示のユーザ要求から提示までの時間を短縮する効果がある。 Note that the date and time range may be set other than when display conditions such as when the date button or page button is pressed are specified. For example, when a condition is specified to acquire program information for a time that can be displayed on one screen of the electronic program guide, the amount of transmitted information decreases, so the time from the user request to the presentation of the net EPG display It has the effect of shortening.
 以上のように、本実施例に係る番組情報受信装置140は、「本体EPG」と「ネットEPG」とを、操作装置230の操作で双方向に表示切替可能な構成で生成する。そのため、ユーザは「ネットEPG」も「本体EPG」と区別することなく利用できる。 As described above, the program information receiving apparatus 140 according to the present embodiment generates the “main body EPG” and the “net EPG” in a configuration that can be bi-directionally switched by the operation of the operation device 230. Therefore, the user can use "net EPG" without distinguishing it from "main EPG".
 また、操作装置230のネットEPGボタンの押下などをトリガに番組情報を取得するため、「ネットEPG」においても「本体EPG」と同様に最も新しい情報で構成した電子番組表を提供することができる。 Further, since program information is acquired triggered by pressing of the net EPG button of the operation device 230 or the like, the "net EPG" can provide an electronic program guide composed of the newest information as in the "main body EPG". .
 さらに、実施例1の番組情報受信装置140と同様に、提示された番組を選択して予約録画する手段をユーザに与える。そのため、ユーザは操作している機器へ予約録画を設定する場合と同じ感覚で、ネットワーク経由で番組情報送信装置110に予約録画を設定できる。 Furthermore, as in the case of the program information receiving apparatus 140 of the first embodiment, the user is provided with means for selecting and presenting a scheduled program. Therefore, the user can set the scheduled recording on the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network in the same way as setting the scheduled recording on the device being operated.
 本実施例では、番組情報送信装置110が番組情報を送出する際に、番組に設定された予約録画の情報も付加する場合について説明する。 In this embodiment, a case will be described in which, when the program information transmitting apparatus 110 transmits program information, information on reserved recording set in the program is also added.
 図34は図15に示したEPGビデオ番組アイテムのプロパティ情報に追加する予約録画に関するプロパティである。 FIG. 34 shows properties related to scheduled recording added to the property information of the EPG video program item shown in FIG.
 番組情報提供部426は番組情報を提供する際に、予約管理部414を参照し番組に予約録画が設定されているかを確認する。予約録画が設定されている番組の場合は、予約録画設定プロパティであるcatv:recordScheduleの値を“1”に設定し、catv:recordSchedule@idの値は、予約録画シーケンス(図21)で設定した予約ID(図24、2420)を設定する。 When providing program information, the program information providing unit 426 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and confirms whether reservation recording is set for the program. For a program for which scheduled recording has been set, the value of catv: recordSchedule, which is a scheduled recording setting property, is set to "1", and the value of catv: recordSchedule @ id is set in the scheduled recording sequence (FIG. 21). The reservation ID (FIG. 24, 2420) is set.
 図35は予約録画に関するプロパティが付加されていた場合の取得番組表生成部510が生成する電子番組表の一例である。図35において図27と同一または相当部分は同一符号で示し、説明を省略する。 FIG. 35 is an example of an electronic program guide generated by the acquired program guide generation unit 510 when the property related to scheduled recording is added. In FIG. 35, parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG.
 3502、3501は予約録画された番組を示す予約録画アイコンの一例である。catv:recordScheduleプロパティの値が“1”に設定されていた番組の各番組欄に予約録画アイコンを表示する。このように、番組情報送信装置110から番組の予約録画の設定情報を取得できるため、EPGサーバから取得したネットEPGを表示する場合も、予約録画の状態を表示できる。ユーザはEPGを表示する操作で、予約録画した番組の確認もできるため使い勝手で良くなる。 Reference numerals 3502 and 3501 denote an example of a scheduled recording icon indicating a program that has been scheduled and recorded. The scheduled recording icon is displayed in each program column of the program for which the value of the catv: recordSchedule property is set to "1". As described above, since the setting information of scheduled recording of a program can be acquired from the program information transmitting apparatus 110, the state of scheduled recording can be displayed even when the net EPG acquired from the EPG server is displayed. The user can confirm the program which has been reserved and recorded by the operation of displaying the EPG, which is convenient.
 図36は予約録画に関するプロパティが付加されていた場合の取得番組表生成部510が生成する各番組欄2230の一例である。図36の例では、アイコン欄3601を設け、そこに予約録画アイコン3602を配置する。本例の場合は、各番組欄2230の高さが変化しても予約録画アイコン3602を変える必要がないため、取得番組表生成部510の処理が簡単にできる効果がある。 FIG. 36 shows an example of each program column 2230 generated by the acquired program table generation unit 510 when the property related to scheduled recording is added. In the example of FIG. 36, an icon column 3601 is provided, and a reserved recording icon 3602 is arranged there. In the case of this example, since it is not necessary to change the reserved recording icon 3602 even if the height of each program column 2230 changes, there is an effect that the process of the acquired program guide generation unit 510 can be simplified.
 以上のように、本実施例の番組情報送信装置110は予約録画が設定されている番組の場合は、番組情報として予約録画設定プロパティも提供する。これより、番組情報受信装置140は予約録画設定状態を電子番組表に表示することができ、ユーザの使い勝手が向上する。 As described above, in the case of a program for which scheduled recording is set, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 of the present embodiment also provides a scheduled recording setting property as program information. Thus, the program information receiving apparatus 140 can display the scheduled recording setting state on the electronic program guide, and the usability for the user is improved.
 本実施例は、番組情報送信装置からネットワークを介して取得した番組情報を用いて、番組情報受信装置が番組情報送信装置に対し、録画装置への放送番組の録画を行う予約録画設定を行うネットワーク経由の予約録画方式について説明する。 In this embodiment, the program information receiving apparatus performs a scheduled recording setting for recording the broadcast program to the recording apparatus to the program information transmitting apparatus using the program information acquired from the program information transmitting apparatus via the network. The reservation video recording method via will be described.
 図1のシステムにおいて、デジタル放送受信装置110は本実施例に係る番組情報送信装置として動作し、ネットワークを介して放送の番組情報を提供する「EPGサーバ機能」を備える。レコーダ150は本実施例に掛かる番組情報受信装置として動作し、ネットワークを介して番組情報を取得しユーザに提供する「EPGクライアント機能」を備える。デジタル放送受信装置140は本実施例に係る録画装置として動作し、ネットワークを介して放送コンテンツを取得し記録する「録画サーバ機能」を備える。 In the system of FIG. 1, the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as a program information transmitting apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network. The recorder 150 operates as a program information receiving apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” that acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information. The digital broadcast receiving apparatus 140 operates as a recording apparatus according to the present embodiment, and includes a “recording server function” that acquires and records broadcast content via a network.
 番組情報送信装置110、録画装置140の構成は各々図2、図3に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the recording apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIG.
 レコーダ150の構成は図2に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The configuration of the recorder 150 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
 番組情報送信装置110のソフトウェア構成は図4に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
 番組情報受信装置150、録画装置140のソフトウェア構成は図5に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The software configurations of the program information receiving apparatus 150 and the recording apparatus 140 are the same as the example shown in FIG.
 次に、番組情報受信装置150が、ネットワークに接続された番組情報送信装置110を探索し、ネットワークに接続された録画装置140を探索し、ネットワーク経由で番組情報送信装置110に録画装置140へのネットワークを介した録画を行う予約録画を設定する手順を説明する。 Next, the program information receiving apparatus 150 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 connected to the network, searches for the recording apparatus 140 connected to the network, and transmits the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to the recording apparatus 140 via the network. A procedure for setting a scheduled recording for recording via a network will be described.
 番組情報受信装置150がネットワーク上にある番組情報送信装置110を探索する手順は図19と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The procedure for the program information receiving apparatus 150 to search for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network is the same as that in FIG.
 図38は番組情報受信装置150がネットワーク上にある録画装置140を探索する手順の一例である。番組情報受信装置150における探索処理はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の録画サーバ探索シーケンスとして実行される。 FIG. 38 shows an example of the procedure of the program information receiving apparatus 150 searching for the recording apparatus 140 on the network. The search processing in the program information receiving apparatus 150 is executed as a recording server search sequence of the network reservation recording application 501.
 S3810:番組情報受信装置150の機器検出部530はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の指示に従って、メッセージ生成部422、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介してネットワーク上の録画サーバを探索するため、録画サーバ機能を提供するMediaServer(DMS)を探索する「デバイス探索」メッセージをホームネットワークを構成する全ての機器に送信する。 S3810: The device detection unit 530 of the program information reception apparatus 150 provides a recording server function to search for a recording server on the network via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501. Search for MediaServer (DMS) Send a "device search" message to all the devices that make up the home network.
 S3811:DMSを探索する「デバイス探索」メッセージを受信した録画装置140は、機器情報サービス424でそのメッセージを処理する。録画装置140のデバイスタイプはMediaServerであるので、機器情報サービス424は自身の機器記述情報の取得先を示すURI(Uniform Resource Identifier)を含むメッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置150に応答する。 S3811: Searching for DMS The recording device 140 that has received the “device search” message processes the message with the device information service 424. Since the device type of the recording device 140 is MediaServer, the device information service 424 generates a message including a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) indicating the acquisition destination of its own device description information, and responds to the program information receiving device 150.
 S3812:応答を受信した番組情報受信装置150の機器検出部530は、応答メッセージに含まれるURIにアクセスし、録画装置140へ機器記述情報を要求する「デバイス情報要求」メッセージを送信する。 S3812: The device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving device 150 that has received the response accesses the URI included in the response message, and transmits a “device information request” message requesting device description information to the recording device 140.
 S3813:機器記述情報の取得先URIへの「デバイス情報要求」メッセージを受信した録画装置140は、機器情報サービス424でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、図6に示した機器記述情報を含むメッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置150に応答する。機器記述情報は、XMLなどの形式で応答メッセージに記述される。 S 3813: The recording device 140 that has received the “device information request” message to the acquisition destination URI of the device description information processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, a message including the device description information shown in FIG. 6 is generated, and the program information receiving apparatus 150 responds. Device description information is described in the response message in a format such as XML.
 図37は録画装置150の機器記述情報の一例である。録画装置140の機器記述情報は図6に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。3701の「av-upload」はネットワークを介して映像音声コンテンツを受信し記録再生部210に記録するアップロードオプション機能を提供することを示す。 FIG. 37 shows an example of the device description information of the recording device 150. The device description information of the recording device 140 is the same as the example shown in FIG. “Av-upload” 3701 indicates providing an upload option function of receiving video and audio content via the network and recording the content on the recording and reproducing unit 210.
 S3814:応答を受信した番組情報受信装置150の機器検出部530は、応答メッセージを解釈し、録画装置140がコンテンツディレクトリサービス(ContentDirectoryService)や予約録画サービス(ScheduledRecordingService)、アップロードオプション機能(av-upload)などを提供することを認識し、各サービスのサービス記述URLにアクセスし、録画装置140へサービスの詳細情報を要求する「サービス情報要求」メッセージを送信する。 S3814: The device detection unit 530 of the program information receiving device 150 that has received the response interprets the response message, and the recording device 140 is a content directory service (ContentDirectoryService), a scheduled recording service (ScheduledRecordingService), an upload option function (av-upload) , Etc., and accesses the service description URL of each service, and transmits a “service information request” message requesting the detailed information of the service to the recording device 140.
 S3815:コンテンツディレクトリサービスと予約録画サービスの機能サービス記述URLへの「サービス情報要求」メッセージを受信した録画装置110は、機器情報サービス424でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、図7、図8に示したようにアクションリストとサービス状態テーブルとを含むサービスの詳細情報で応答メッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置150に応答する。 S3815: The recording device 110 that has received the “service information request” message to the function service description URL of the content directory service and the reservation recording service processes the message with the device information service 424. Then, as shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, a response message is generated with the detailed information of the service including the action list and the service status table, and the program information receiving device 150 is responded.
 S3816:応答を受信した番組情報受信装置150の機器検出部530は、コンテンツディレクトリサービスのサービス詳細情報をコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525へ、予約録画サービスのサービス詳細情報を予約録画設定コントローラ529に渡す。各コントローラはサービス詳細情報を解釈し、各サービスが提供するアクションを認識する。そして、コンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525はネットワーク予約録画アプリ501の指示に従って、録画装置140のコンテンツディレクトリサービスがEPGを提供するかを確認するためにFeatureListアクションを送信する。 S3816: The device detection section 530 of the program information receiving apparatus 150 which has received the response passes the service detailed information of the content directory service to the content directory controller 525 and delivers the service detailed information of the reservation recording service to the reservation recording setting controller 529. Each controller interprets service detail information and recognizes an action provided by each service. Then, the content directory controller 525 transmits a FeatureList action to confirm whether the content directory service of the recording device 140 provides an EPG according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 501.
 S3817:FeatureListアクションを受信した録画装置140は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425でそのメッセージを処理する。そして、録画装置140は、コンテンツディレクトリサービス425で、図9に示したような、録画装置140が提供する情報コンテンツ一覧情報を返すメッセージを生成し、番組情報受信装置150に応答する。応答メッセージを受信したコンテンツディレクトリコントローラ525は<Features>タグ930に含まれる<Feature>931、932のname属性に“EPG”を含むものが存在することから、録画装置140が番組情報を提供するEPGサーバであることを認識し、また、その<objectIDs>タグからEPGを取得するためのIDを得る(931)。 S3817: The recording device 140 that has received the FeatureList action processes the message in the content directory service 425. Then, the recording device 140 generates a message that returns the information content list information provided by the recording device 140 as shown in FIG. 9 with the content directory service 425, and responds to the program information receiving device 150. Since the content directory controller 525 that has received the response message includes “EPG” in the name attribute of <Feature> 931, 932 included in the <Features> tag 930, the EPG in which the recording device 140 provides program information is present. It recognizes that it is a server, and obtains an ID for acquiring an EPG from its <objectIDs> tag (931).
 ネットワーク予約録画アプリ501は探索した録画サーバ(録画装置)140の機器記述情報、サービスの詳細情報、および、FeatureListアクションで取得した情報コンテンツ一覧情報など録画サーバ情報を、録画装置140のネットワークIDなどで参照できる形式でメモリ213に記憶する。 The network reservation recording application 501 stores recording server information such as the device description information of the recording server (recording device) 140 searched, detailed information of the service, and information content list information acquired by the FeatureList action by the network ID of the recording device 140 or the like. It is stored in the memory 213 in a format that can be referred to.
 S3810の「デバイス探索」メッセージに対して複数の録画装置から応答があった場合は、それぞれの録画装置に対してS3812からS3817のシーケンスを行い録画サーバ(録画装置)の録画サーバ情報を取得しメモリ213に記憶する。また、発見した録画サーバの数もメモリ213に記憶する。 When there is a response from a plurality of recording devices in response to the "device search" message of S3810, the sequence from S3812 to S3817 is performed for each recording device to acquire the recording server information of the recording server (recording device), and the memory Store in 213. In addition, the number of recording servers found is also stored in the memory 213.
 以上の手順で、番組情報受信装置150は録画装置140を探索する。この探索手順の実行タイミングは番組情報受信装置150がネットワークに接続されたときでも、ユーザがネットワーク上の録画サーバの探索を要求したときでもよい。ユーザの要求にかかわらず、ネットワークに接続されたときに探索する場合は、ユーザから要求があった際にユーザを待たせず探索結果を提示できる利点がある。 The program information receiving apparatus 150 searches the recording apparatus 140 according to the above procedure. The execution timing of the search procedure may be when the program information receiving apparatus 150 is connected to the network or when the user requests a search for a recording server on the network. Regardless of the user's request, searching when connected to the network has the advantage of being able to present the search results without having to wait for the user when requested by the user.
 番組情報受信装置150がネットワーク上にある番組情報送信装置110からEPG情報を取得する手順は図20と同じであるため省略する。
ユーザが予約した予約録画を番組情報送信装置110に設定する手順は図21と同じである。
The procedure for the program information receiving apparatus 150 to obtain EPG information from the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network is the same as that shown in FIG.
The procedure for setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is the same as that in FIG.
 図41にEPGダイレクト予約録画を行う場合の「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求メッセージの一例を示す。図41において図24と同一または相当部分は同一符号で示し、説明を省略する。 FIG. 41 shows an example of a request message of “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing EPG direct reservation recording. In FIG. 41, the parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG.
 <recordDestination>タグ4101は予約録画の録画先機器名を示す。<recordDestination>タグで特定される文字列により、図6に示した機器の名称を特定する。 The <recordDestination> tag 4101 indicates the recording destination device name of scheduled recording. The name of the device shown in FIG. 6 is specified by the character string specified by the <recordDestination> tag.
 <desiredRecordQuality>タグ4102で特定される文字列により録画品質を特定する。 The recording quality is specified by the character string specified by the <desiredRecordQuality> tag 4102.
 図42にEPGダイレクトでない標準予約録画を行う場合の「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」アクションの要求メッセージの一例を示す。図42において図25(a)と同一または相当部分は同一符号で示し、説明を省略する。 FIG. 42 shows an example of a request message of “reservation recording object creation request” action in the case of performing standard reservation recording which is not EPG direct. In FIG. 42, the parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG.
 <recordDestination@mediaType>タグ4201により特定される文字列により、録画装置140が複数の記録部を有する場合の録画先を特定する。
<recordDestination@targetURL>タグ4202で特定される文字列により、録画装置140のURLを特定する。
The character string specified by the <recordDestination @ mediaType> tag 4201 specifies a recording destination in the case where the recording device 140 has a plurality of recording units.
The URL of the recording device 140 is specified by the character string specified by the <recordDestination @ targetURL> tag 4202.
 <desiredRecordQuality@type>タグ4203で特定される文字列により、録画品質を特定する。録画品質にDEFAULTを設定すると、番組情報送信装置110で設定されている録画品質で録画を行う。 The recording quality is specified by the character string specified by the <desiredRecordQuality @ type> tag 4203. When DEFAULT is set as the recording quality, recording is performed with the recording quality set by the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
 図39は番組情報送信装置110がネットワーク上にある録画装置140にアップロード録画を行う手順である。 FIG. 39 shows the procedure of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 performing upload recording on the recording apparatus 140 on the network.
 S3910:番組情報送信装置110は予約管理部で管理した録画予約の時刻になると、予約録画オブジェクトとして受信した情報に基づき、メッセージ生成部422、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介してネットワーク上の録画サーバ140に録画オブジェクト作成要求する。 S3910: When the time of recording reservation managed by the reservation management unit comes, the program information transmitting apparatus 110, based on the information received as a reservation recording object, the recording server 140 on the network via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420. Request to create a recording object.
 S3911:録画サーバ140は受信した録画オブジェクト作成要求に従い、コンテンツ管理部で録画ID、URLを生成し、結果(Result)とともに、メッセージ生成部422、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介してネットワーク上の番組情報送信装置110に応答する。 S3911: The recording server 140 generates the recording ID and the URL in the content management unit according to the received recording object generation request, and with the result (Result), the program information on the network via the message generation unit 422 and the network communication processing unit 420 The transmitter 110 responds.
 S3912:応答を受信した番組情報送信装置110は、録画確認を行うためにメディア配信サービス423、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介して応答メッセージに含まれるURLに対し、HTTPプロトコルのHeaderのみを送信(POST)する。 S3912: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 having received the response transmits only the HTTP protocol Header to the URL contained in the response message via the media distribution service 423 and the network communication processing unit 420 to confirm the recording (POST ).
 S3913:Headerを受信した録画装置140は、正常に録画が可能であることを通知するために、メディア受信コントローラ523、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介して、HTTPプロトコルのレスポンスで正常(100 continue)を送信する。 S3913: The recording device 140 that has received the Header normally (100 continue) in response to the HTTP protocol via the media reception controller 523 and the network communication processing unit 420 in order to notify that recording is normally possible. Send.
 S3914:レスポンスを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、録画を行うためにメディア配信サービス423、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介して応答メッセージに含まれるURLに対し、HTTPプロトコルのBodyを送信(POST)する。 S3914: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the response transmits (POST) the HTTP protocol Body to the URL contained in the response message via the media distribution service 423 and the network communication processing unit 420 to perform recording. .
 S3915:番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画を終了するためにメディア配信サービス423、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介して応答メッセージに含まれるURLに対し、HTTPプロトコルのBodyの送信終了(POST End)通知する。 S3915: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 notifies the transmission end (POST End) of HTTP protocol Body transmission to the URL contained in the response message via the media distribution service 423 and the network communication processing unit 420 to end the scheduled recording. Do.
 S3916:POST Endを受信した録画装置140は、正常に録画が終了したこと通知するために、メディア受信コントローラ523、ネットワーク通信処理部420を介して、HTTPプロトコルのPOSTレスポンス(POST Response)を送信する。 S3916: The recording device 140 that has received the POST End transmits a POST response (POST Response) of the HTTP protocol via the media reception controller 523 and the network communication processing unit 420 in order to notify that the recording has ended normally. .
 図40は取得番組表生成部510が生成する電子番組表の一例である。図40において図22と同一または相当部分は同一符号で示し、説明を省略する。 FIG. 40 shows an example of the electronic program guide generated by the acquired program guide generator 510. In FIG. 40, parts that are the same as or correspond to those in FIG.
 予約ダイヤログ4000は、予約時刻情報4001、番組情報4002、録画先情報4003、録画モード情報4004などから構成される。 The reservation dialog 4000 includes reservation time information 4001, program information 4002, recording destination information 4003, recording mode information 4004, and the like.
 予約時刻情報4001にはユーザが予約を指定した番組の日時情報を表示する。ユーザが時刻情報を変更することも可能である。 The reservation time information 4001 displays date and time information of a program for which the user has specified a reservation. It is also possible for the user to change the time information.
 番組情報4002にはチャンネル、番組名を表示する。 The program information 4002 displays a channel and a program name.
 録画先情報4003には、録画可能な機器をUPnPのフレンドリネーム表示し、どの機器に録画するかユーザが選択できる。フレンドリネームは録画可能な機器を識別する情報である。 The recording destination information 4003 displays UPnP-friendly friendly display of recordable devices, and the user can select which device to record. The friendly rename is information for identifying a recordable device.
 ユーザ指示により録画機能付STB110が選択されると番組情報送信装置110に録画予約を行い、番組情報送信装置110で録画を行う。 When STB 110 with a recording function is selected by a user instruction, recording reservation is performed on program information transmitting apparatus 110, and recording is performed in program information transmitting apparatus 110.
 ユーザ指示により録画機能付DTVが選択されると、番組情報送信装置110に録画予約を行い、録画装置140にネットワーク録画を行う。 When the DTV with a recording function is selected by a user instruction, recording reservation is performed on the program information transmitting apparatus 110, and network recording is performed on the recording apparatus 140.
 ユーザ指示によりDTV130が選択されると、番組情報送信装置110と番組情報受信装置150に録画予約を行い、番組情報受信装置150にネットワーク録画を行う。DTV150自身で受信可能な番組であれば、番組情報受信装置150に録画予約を行い、番組情報送信装置110で録画を行う。 When the DTV 130 is selected by a user instruction, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 150 make a recording reservation, and the program information receiving apparatus 150 performs a network recording. If it is a program that can be received by the DTV 150 itself, recording reservation is made to the program information receiving apparatus 150, and recording is performed by the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
 録画モード情報4004にはハイビジョン画質(HD)、標準画質(XP)等の録画モードを表示し、ユーザが変更できる。 In the recording mode information 4004, a recording mode such as high definition image quality (HD) or standard image quality (XP) is displayed and can be changed by the user.
 予約ダイヤログ4000で選択された「番組に関する情報」は、予約録画オブジェクト作成要求に反映され、その情報は、さらに録画オブジェクト作成要求に反映される。ここでいう「番組に関する情報」には、EPGダイレクト予約の場合、番組名2413、その番組の属性id2415、録画先機器名4101、録画品質4102を含む。また、ここでいう「番組に関する情報」には、EPGダイレクト予約でない標準予約録画の場合、さらに録画装置が複数の記録部を有する場合の録画先4201、録画装置のURL4202を含めることができる。図42中、図25と共通する番号の要素は、図25と同様のため、説明を省略する。 The “information on program” selected in the reservation dialog 4000 is reflected in the reservation video recording object creation request, and the information is further reflected in the video recording object creation request. In the case of the EPG direct reservation, the “information on program” mentioned here includes a program name 2413, an attribute id 2415 of the program, a recording destination device name 4101 and a recording quality 4102. Further, in the case of standard reservation recording which is not EPG direct reservation, the “information on program” mentioned here can further include a recording destination 4201 and a URL 4202 of the recording device when the recording device has a plurality of recording units. In FIG. 42, elements with numbers common to those in FIG. 25 are the same as in FIG.
 以上のように、本実施例に掛かる番組情報送信装置110は、ネットワーク上の他の機器にEPG情報を提供し、そのEPG情報から得た番組情報を用いて番組情報送信装置110に予約録画を設定するインターフェースを提供する。 As described above, the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the present embodiment provides the EPG information to other devices on the network, and uses the program information obtained from the EPG information to make a reservation recording in the program information transmitting apparatus 110. Provide an interface to configure.
 また、本実施例に掛かるEPGクライアント搭載機器である番組情報受信装置150は、ネットワークに接続されたEPGサーバ搭載機器である番組情報送信装置110を探索し、EPG情報を取得し、ネットワークに接続された録画サーバ搭載機器である録画装置140を探索し、その情報から電子番組表画面を生成しユーザに提示する。そして、提示された番組を選択して予約録画する手段をユーザに与える。そのため、ユーザは操作している機器へ予約録画を設定する場合と同じ感覚で、ネットワーク経由で番組情報送信装置110に録画装置140へのネットワーク録画を行う予約録画を設定できる。 The program information receiving apparatus 150, which is an EPG client-equipped device according to the present embodiment, searches for the program information transmitting device 110, which is an EPG server-equipped device connected to the network, acquires EPG information, and is connected to the network. The recording device 140, which is a recording server-equipped device, is searched, and an electronic program guide screen is generated from the information and presented to the user. Then, the user is provided with means for selecting the presented program and performing scheduled recording. Therefore, the user can set scheduled recording for performing network recording on the recording device 140 in the program information transmitting device 110 via the network in the same way as setting scheduled recording for the device being operated.
 本実施例では、番組情報受信装置がユーザのリモコンなど操作装置230を操作してネットワークで接続された番組情報送信装置から番組情報を取得し、取得したEPGオブジェクトに登録されている番組のプロパティ情報を基に、番組情報の取得や番組の録画を行なうものである。本実施例では、実施例1で図12から図15を用いて説明したプロパティ情報に追加するプロパティ情報について説明し、これら追加されたプロパティ情報を用いた処理について説明する。 In this embodiment, the program information receiving apparatus operates the operation device 230 such as a user's remote control to acquire program information from the program information transmitting apparatus connected via the network, and property information of the program registered in the acquired EPG object The program information is acquired and the program is recorded based on the above. In this embodiment, property information to be added to the property information described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15 in the first embodiment will be described, and processing using the added property information will be described.
 図1のシステムにおいて、デジタル放送受信装置110は本実施例に掛かる番組情報送信装置110として動作し、ネットワークを介して放送の番組情報を提供する「EPGサーバ機能」を備える。録画機能付DTV140は本実施例に掛かる番組情報受信装置140として動作し、ネットワークを介して番組情報を取得しユーザに提供する「EPGクライアント機能」を備える。ここでは説明の便宜上録画機能付DTV140を番組情報受信装置の一例として説明するが、レコーダ150を本実施例の番組情報受信装置としてもよい。 In the system of FIG. 1, the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network. The DTV with recording function 140 operates as the program information receiving apparatus 140 according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” which acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information. Here, although the DTV 140 with a recording function is described as an example of the program information receiving apparatus for convenience of explanation, the recorder 150 may be used as the program information receiving apparatus of the present embodiment.
 番組情報送信装置110、番組情報受信装置140の構成は各々図2、図3に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。また、番組情報送信装置110のソフトウェア構成も図4に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。番組情報受信装置140のソフトウェア構成は、番組表を提示する場合は図26に示した例と同じであり、予約録画を設定する場合は図5に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. Further, the software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is also the same as the example shown in FIG. The software configuration of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 26 in the case of presenting a program guide, and is the same as the example shown in FIG. .
 図43(a)から図43(g)は、各コンテナ、アイテムに定義されるプロパティ情報の詳細を示す。ここで定義するプロパティはネットワーク書式の番組情報であるEPGオブジェクトに用いるものである。番組情報変換部412が、デジタル放送で用いられる放送書式の番組情報を変換し、ネットワーク書式の番組情報を生成する。 43 (a) to 43 (g) show details of property information defined in each container and item. The properties defined here are used for an EPG object which is program information in a network format. The program information conversion unit 412 converts program information of a broadcast format used in digital broadcasting to generate program information of a network format.
 ここで例えば図43(b)に示している“upnp:seriesTitle”プロパティについて説明する。本“upnp:seriesTitle”プロパティは、同一の性質を持つ番組の集合に関して定義されるタイトル、例えば連続ドラマの番組名(AAAAとする)である。上記プロパティ情報を番組情報送信装置110から番組情報受信装置140へ向けて送信する場合、図18のXMLドキュメント内に示す番組アイテム1834に以下を追加する。図18のXMLドキュメント内に示す番組アイテム1834に既に登録されている<upnp:genre>ドラマ</upnp:genre>の下に、<upnp:seriesTitle>AAAAA</upnp:seriesTitle>を追加すれば良い。処理シーケンスについては相手がネットワーク上にある番組情報送信装置110のときは図20となる。各々の処理については前記しているので説明を省略する。 Here, for example, the “upnp: seriesTitle” property shown in FIG. 43 (b) will be described. The "upnp: seriesTitle" property is a title defined for a set of programs having the same property, for example, a program name of a drama series (referred to as AAAA). When the property information is to be transmitted from the program information transmitting apparatus 110 to the program information receiving apparatus 140, the following is added to the program item 1834 shown in the XML document of FIG. You can add <upnp: seriesTitle> AAAAA </ upnp: seriesTitle> under <upnp: genre> drama </ upnp: genre> already registered in the program item 1834 shown in the XML document in FIG. . The processing sequence is as shown in FIG. 20 when the other party is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 on the network. Description of each process is omitted since it is described above.
 番組情報受信装置140は上記シーケンスで図18に示すXMLドキュメントを受信し、番組アイテム1834の情報を取得する。例えば受信したXMLドキュメントに<upnp:seriesTitle>AAAAA</upnp:seriesTitle>が存在すると、“AAAAA”という番組名のTVシリーズのドラマということがわかる。例えばユーザが番組情報受信装置140を操作装置230で操作して“AAAAA”という番組名のドラマの一連の番組情報を表示したい場合、受信したXMLドキュメント内、属性“upnp:seriesTitle”が“AAAAA”であるEPGビデオアイテムを持つ番組情報を、番組情報を格納した場所(記録再生部210またはメモリ213等)から読み出せば、TVシリーズのドラマを一括して表示することができる。また、番組情報受信装置140がネットワークを介して録画サーバと接続されていたならば、番組名“AAAAA”のTVシリーズのドラマが一括で録画予約が可能となる。TVシリーズのドラマを一括して録画予約するためには、ユーザによる“AAAAA”という番組の指定に従い、番組情報受信装置140が、プロパティ“upnp:seriesTitle”が“AAAAA”を持つEPGビデオ番組アイテムの数だけ、予約録画オブジェクトを作成するよう、番組情報送信装置110に要求すればよい。各予約録画オブジェクトにおいて各番組を特定するには、図24および図41のように、作成される各予約録画オブジェクトの属性“scheduledCDSObjectID”に、読み出したEPGビデオ番組アイテムの属性idをそれぞれセットすればよい。または、予約録画される各番組を予約録画オブジェクトにおいて特定する他の方法として、図25(a)および図42のように、読み出したEPGビデオ番組アイテムの番組名(dc:Title)、番組開始時刻(scheduledStartTime)、番組の時間の長さ(res@duration)を、予約録画オブジェクトに設定することも可能である。TVシリーズのドラマを一括で録画予約する、さらに他の方法として、予約録画オブジェクトにおいて“upnp:seriesTitle”を指定することもできる。この場合、番組情報送信装置110が、受信した予約録画オブジェクト作成要求を処理する中で、“upnp:seriesTitle”が“AAAAA”であることを検索条件として、予め格納された番組情報から、“AAAAA”に関するEPGビデオ番組アイテムを読み出し、各予約録画オブジェクトを作成することも可能である。 The program information receiving apparatus 140 receives the XML document shown in FIG. 18 in the above sequence, and acquires the information of the program item 1834. For example, if <upnp: seriesTitle> AAAAA </ upnp: seriesTitle> is present in the received XML document, it is known that the TV series is a drama of the program name "AAAAA". For example, when the user operates the program information receiving apparatus 140 with the operation device 230 and wants to display a series of program information of a drama named "AAAAA", the attribute "upnp: seriesTitle" is "AAAAA" in the received XML document If the program information having the EPG video item, which is the above, is read out from the place (the recording / reproducing unit 210 or the memory 213 or the like) storing the program information, the TV series drama can be displayed collectively. Also, if the program information receiving apparatus 140 is connected to the recording server via the network, the TV series drama of the program name "AAAAA" can be collectively scheduled for recording. In order to record and schedule TV series dramas collectively, according to the user's designation of the program "AAAAA", the program information receiving apparatus 140 is an EPG video program item whose property "upnp: seriesTitle" has "AAAAA". The program information transmitting apparatus 110 may be requested to create a reserved recording object by the number. To specify each program in each scheduled recording object, set the attribute id of the read EPG video program item to the attribute "scheduledCDSObjectID" of each scheduled recording object to be created as shown in Figs. 24 and 41. Good. Alternatively, as another method of specifying each program to be reserved for recording in the reserved recording object, as shown in FIG. 25A and FIG. 42, the program title (dc: Title) of the read EPG video program item, the program start time (ScheduledStartTime) It is also possible to set the length of time of the program (res @ duration) to the scheduled recording object. As another method of recording and scheduling TV series dramas collectively, "upnp: seriesTitle" can also be designated in a reservation recording object. In this case, while the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is processing the received reservation video recording object creation request, the program information stored in advance is stored as "AAAAA", with "upnp: seriesTitle" being "AAAAA" as a search condition. It is also possible to read out the EPG video program items relating to "and create each scheduled recording object.
 図43(b)に示す“upnp:seriesID”プロパティは、上記で一例として紹介した番組名“AAAAA”の連続ドラマにユニークなIDを付与したものである。上記同様にユニークなIDを基に番組情報の一括取得や、一括録画予約が可能となる。その手順は、上述の番組情報の一括取得と一括録画予約の手順の説明で“upnp:seriesTitle”としたところを、“upnp:seriesID”と読み替えれば良い。 The “upnp: series ID” property shown in FIG. 43 (b) is obtained by giving a unique ID to the serial drama of the program name “AAAAA” introduced as an example above. As described above, batch acquisition of program information and batch recording reservation can be performed based on the unique ID. The procedure may be read as "upnp: seriesID" where "upnp: seriesTitle" is mentioned in the explanation of the above-mentioned procedure for batch acquisition of program information and batch recording reservation.
 図43(c)から図43(d)は、番組の出演者、製作者、原作者などの名前を登録するものである。例えば、upnp:artistプロパティを使用して図18に示すXMLドキュメントに<upnp:artist>BBBB</upnp:artist>を追加したとき、番組情報受信装置140は、出演者“BBBB”の番組情報の取得や録画予約を行なうことができる。また、出演者“BBBB”を基に“BBBB”が出演している番組情報の一括取得や一括録画予約を行なうことが可能となる。また、他のプロパティによる番組情報の一括取得や一括録画も可能である。一括取得や一括録画の手順は、上述の番組情報の一括取得の手順の説明で“upnp:seriesTitle”としたところを、“upnp:artist”や他のプロパティに読み替えれば良い。一括録画においては、一括取得された番組情報の中から視聴者の所望の番組の指定を受け付けるためのダイアログを番組情報受信装置140が表示し、そのダイアログボックスに表示された番組の中から視聴者に選択された番組について録画予約オブジェクト作成要求を番組情報送信装置に送信しても良い。 FIGS. 43 (c) to 43 (d) are for registering names of performers, producers, original authors, etc. of the program. For example, when <upnp: artist> BBBB </ upnp: artist> is added to the XML document shown in FIG. 18 using the upnp: artist property, the program information receiving apparatus 140 displays the program information of the performer "BBBB". Acquisition and recording reservation can be performed. Moreover, it becomes possible to perform package acquisition and package recording reservation of program information in which "BBBB" has appeared based on performer "BBBB". Moreover, package acquisition and program recording of program information by other properties are also possible. The procedures of batch acquisition and batch recording may be replaced with “upnp: artist” and other properties in place of “upnp: seriesTitle” in the above description of the procedure of batch acquisition of program information. In the batch recording, the program information receiving apparatus 140 displays a dialog for accepting the designation of the program desired by the viewer from the program information acquired in a batch, and the viewer is selected from the programs displayed in the dialog box. The recording reservation object creation request may be transmitted to the program information transmitting apparatus for the program selected in.
 以上、図43(a)から図43(g)に示した各コンテナ、アイテムに定義されるプロパティ情報のうち幾つか説明した。例えば本実施例で説明したupnp:seriesTitleプロパティとupnp:artistプロパティを同時に使用するとupnp:seriesTitleプロパティに示されている番組名“AAAAA”のupnp:artistプロパティに示されている出演者“BBBB”で、更に限定した番組情報の取得や録画予約を行なうことが可能になる。本実施例では、upnp:seriesTitleプロパティで連続ドラマの番組名を、upnp:artistプロパティで出演者を指定したが、図43(a)から図43(g)に示したプロパティ情報を組み合わせることで、ユーザの嗜好に合わせた番組情報の取得や録画予約が可能となる。 In the above, some of the property information defined in each container and item shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (g) have been described. For example, when simultaneously using the upnp: seriesTitle property and the upnp: artist property described in the present embodiment, the performer "BBBB" shown in the upnp: artist property of the program name "AAAAA" shown in the upnp: seriesTitle property Further, it becomes possible to obtain more limited program information and to make a recording reservation. In this embodiment, the program name of the drama series is specified in the upnp: seriesTitle property, and the performer is specified in the upnp: artist property, but by combining the property information shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (g), Acquisition of program information and recording reservation can be performed in accordance with the preference of the user.
 以上、説明してきた通り本実施例では、番組を特定するプロパティ情報を番組情報受信装置で持つことにより、リモコンなど操作装置230においてユーザの嗜好に合わせた操作をすることが可能になる。 As described above, in the present embodiment, by having property information for specifying a program in the program information receiving apparatus, it becomes possible to perform an operation according to the user's preference in the operation device 230 such as a remote control.
 本実施例は、番組情報送信装置からネットワークを介して取得した番組情報を用いて番組情報受信装置が番組情報送信装置に対し予約録画を設定する際に、設定する予約録画が他の予約録画と重複した場合の予約録画方式について説明する。 In this embodiment, when the program information receiving apparatus sets the reservation recording for the program information transmitting apparatus using the program information acquired from the program information transmitting apparatus via the network, the reservation recording to be set is another reservation recording and The scheduled recording method in the case of duplication will be described.
 図1のシステムにおいて、デジタル放送受信装置110は本実施例に係る番組情報送信装置110として動作し、ネットワークを介して放送の番組情報を提供する「EPGサーバ機能」を備える。レコーダ150は本実施例に係る番組情報受信装置140として動作し、ネットワークを介して番組情報を取得しユーザに提供する「EPGクライアント機能」を備える。 In the system of FIG. 1, the digital broadcast receiving apparatus 110 operates as the program information transmitting apparatus 110 according to the present embodiment, and has an “EPG server function” that provides broadcast program information via a network. The recorder 150 operates as the program information receiving apparatus 140 according to the present embodiment, and includes an “EPG client function” that acquires program information via a network and provides the user with the program information.
 番組情報送信装置110、番組情報受信装置140のハードウェア構成は各々図2、図3に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The hardware configurations of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 and the program information receiving apparatus 140 are the same as the examples shown in FIGS.
 番組情報送信装置110のソフトウェア構成は図4に示した例と同じである。
  本実施例において、予約管理部414は、実施例1に示した機能に加え、予約録画サービス429から指定される録画の予約を受け付け、予約の重複の有無を検出する。
The software configuration of the program information transmitting apparatus 110 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, in addition to the functions described in the first embodiment, the reservation management unit 414 receives a recording reservation designated by the reservation recording service 429, and detects the presence or absence of duplication of the reservation.
 予約録画サービス429は、実施例1に示した機能に加え、ネットワークを介した予約録画の登録を予約管理部414に設定した際に、予約録画サービス429が検出した予約の重複有無を確認し、予約の重複がある場合には、予約が重複している旨、または、予約管理部414から取得した重複している予約番組の情報を、予約録画のリクエストを送信した機器に対して提供する。その他の構成は実施例1と同じであるため説明は省略する。 When the reservation recording service 429 sets registration of reservation recording via the network in the reservation management unit 414 in addition to the functions described in the first embodiment, the reservation recording service 429 checks whether the reservation recording service 429 overlaps or not. If there is a duplication of reservation, the information indicating that the reservation is duplicated or the information of the overlapping reserved program acquired from the reservation management unit 414 is provided to the device that has transmitted the reservation recording request. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and hence the description is omitted.
 番組情報受信装置140のソフトウェア構成は図26に示した例と同じであるため説明は省略する。 The software configuration of the program information receiving apparatus 140 is the same as the example shown in FIG.
 次に、番組情報受信装置140が、ネットワークに接続された番組情報送信装置110を探索し、ネットワーク経由で番組情報送信装置110に対して番組情報送信装置110へ予約録画(予約録画2)を設定する際に、番組情報送信装置110にすでに設定されている他の予約録画(予約録画1)と重複した場合の予約録画方式について説明する。 Next, the program information receiving apparatus 140 searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110 connected to the network, and sets reservation recording (reservation recording 2) to the program information transmitting apparatus 110 with respect to the program information transmitting apparatus 110 via the network. A scheduled recording method in the case of overlapping with another scheduled recording (reservation recording 1) which has already been set in the program information transmitting apparatus 110 will be described.
 図44はユーザが先約した予約録画を番組情報送信装置110に設定する手順であり、番組情報送信装置110は、予約重複応答をする際に重複があることのみを応答する機能を持つ場合の手順である。
  番組情報受信装置140における予約録画設定処理はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611によって予約録画シーケンスとして実行される。
FIG. 44 shows the procedure for setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110. The program information transmitting apparatus 110 has a function of responding only when there is an overlap when making a reservation overlap response. It is a procedure.
The scheduled recording setting process in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network scheduled recording application 2611 as a scheduled recording sequence.
 S4410:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611の指示に従って、ユーザが選択した番組の予約録画1を設定する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを送信する。
  メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージの引数は予約する番組の情報を記述した「予約情報1」である。本実施例では、番組情報送信装置110がEpgダイレクト予約録画機能を提供するため、番組アイテムのタイトルとIDプロパティだけで予約設定できる。
S4410: The reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation recording object creation request” message for setting reservation recording 1 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611.
The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user. An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 1” in which information of a program to be reserved is described. In this embodiment, since the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the Epg direct reserved recording function, reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
 S4411:「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、予約の重複がなければ、その番組予約を予約管理部414に設定する。予約を受け付た場合は、予約録画1を参照するための識別子である予約ID1と、予約結果の情報であるResultを番組情報受信装置140に返す。 S4411: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "reservation recording object creation request" message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and sets the program reservation in the reservation management unit 414 if there is no duplication of reservation. When the reservation is received, the program information receiving device 140 returns a reservation ID 1 which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording 1 and a result which is information of a reservation result.
 S4412:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611の指示に従って、ユーザが選択した番組の予約録画2を設定する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを送信する。メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。
  「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージの引数は予約する番組の情報を記述した「予約情報2」である。本実施例では、番組情報送信装置110がEpgダイレクト予約録画機能を提供するため、番組アイテムのタイトルとIDプロパティだけで予約設定できる。
S4412: The scheduled recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “scheduled recording object creation request” message for setting the scheduled recording 2 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611. The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 2” in which information of a program to be reserved is described. In this embodiment, since the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the Epg direct reserved recording function, reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
 S4413:「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、予約録画2が予約録画1と予約の重複があるため、その番組予約を予約管理部414に設定せず、番組情報受信装置140へ予約が重複している応答を返す。応答を受信した番組情報受信装置140は、後述する図47に示す画面を出力し、操作信号受信部226を介したユーザからの指示を受け付ける。
  ユーザが「終了4704」を選択した場合は図44の予約録画設定処理を終了し、「予約一覧4703」を選択した場合はS4414に進む。
S4413: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "reservation recording object creation request" message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and since the reservation recording 2 overlaps the reservation recording 1 and the reservation, the program reservation is not set in the reservation management unit 414, and the reservation is made to the program information receiving apparatus 140. Return duplicate responses. The program information receiving apparatus 140 having received the response outputs a screen shown in FIG. 47 described later, and receives an instruction from the user via the operation signal receiving unit 226.
If the user selects "END 4704", the scheduled recording setting process of FIG. 44 ends, and if the user selects "RECORDED LIST 4703", the process advances to step S4414.
 S4414:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611の指示に従って、予約一覧を要求する「予約一覧要求」メッセージを送信する。メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。 S4414: The reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation list request” message for requesting a reservation list according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611. The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
 S4415:「予約一覧要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、設定された予約の予約IDと予約録画時刻を含む予約一覧を応答として、番組情報受信装置140へ返す。予約一覧には、図12、13、14、15、43で示した各プロパティをの情報を含む。
  予約一覧応答を受信した番組情報受信装置140は、後述する図49、図50に示す画面を表示し、操作信号受信部226を介して削除する予約録画の入力を受け付ける。
  図49に示す画面において、ユーザが「キャンセル4904」を選択した場合は図44の予約録画設定処理を終了し、予約一覧に記載された特定の予約録画を選択した場合は図50に示す画面が表示される。
S4415: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the “reservation list request” message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and returns a reservation list including the set reservation ID and reservation recording time to the program information receiving apparatus 140 as a response. The reservation list includes information on each property shown in FIGS. 12, 13, 14, 15, and 43.
The program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the reservation list response displays the screens shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 described later, and accepts an input of reservation recording to be deleted via the operation signal reception unit 226.
In the screen shown in FIG. 49, when the user selects “cancel 4904”, the scheduled recording setting process of FIG. 44 is ended, and when the specific reserved recording described in the reservation list is selected, the screen shown in FIG. Is displayed.
 図50に示す画面では、図49の画面においてユーザが選択された予約録画の情報が表示される。図50において、ユーザが「キャンセル5002」を選択した場合は図44の予約録画設定処理を終了し、「削除5003」を選択した場合はS4416に進む。 On the screen shown in FIG. 50, information of scheduled recording selected by the user on the screen of FIG. 49 is displayed. In FIG. 50, when the user selects “cancel 5002”, the scheduled recording setting process of FIG. 44 is ended, and when “delete 5003” is selected, the process proceeds to S4416.
 S4416:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529は、選択された予約録画2と重複する予約録画1の予約ID1を指定し、「予約削除要求」メッセージを番組情報送信装置110へ送信する。 S4416: The reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 designates the reservation ID 1 of reservation recording 1 overlapping the selected reservation recording 2, and transmits a “reservation deletion request” message to the program information transmitting apparatus 110.
 S4417:「予約削除要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、指定された予約ID1の予約オブジェクトを削除する。削除が実行された場合は、予約削除した応答を番組情報受信装置140に返す。 S4417: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "reservation deletion request" message processes the message by the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and deletes the reservation object of the designated reservation ID 1. When the deletion is executed, the response for which the reservation has been deleted is returned to the program information receiving apparatus 140.
 S4418:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611の指示に従って、ユーザが選択した番組の予約録画を設定する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを送信する。メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージの引数は予約する番組の情報を記述した「予約情報2」である。本実施例では、番組情報送信装置110がEpgダイレクト予約録画機能を提供するため、番組アイテムのタイトルとIDプロパティだけで予約設定できる。 S4418: The scheduled recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “scheduled recording object creation request” message for setting scheduled recording of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611. The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user. An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 2” in which information of a program to be reserved is described. In this embodiment, since the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the Epg direct reserved recording function, reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
 S4419:「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。また、予約管理部414を参照し、予約の重複がなければ、その番組予約を予約管理部414に設定する。予約を受け付た場合は、予約録画を参照するための識別子である予約ID2と、予約結果の情報であるResultを返す。 S4419: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429. Also, referring to the reservation management unit 414, if there is no duplication of reservation, the program reservation is set in the reservation management unit 414. When the reservation is received, a reservation ID 2 which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording and a result which is information of the reservation result are returned.
 以上により、予約情報2と重複する予約情報1を削除し、予約情報2を設定することができる。 As described above, the reservation information 1 overlapping with the reservation information 2 can be deleted and the reservation information 2 can be set.
 図45は、ユーザが先約した予約録画を番組情報送信装置110に設定する手順であり、番組情報送信装置110は、予約重複応答時に重複する予約を併せて応答する機能を持つ場合の手順である。番組情報受信装置140における予約録画設定処理はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611によって予約録画シーケンスとして実行される。 FIG. 45 shows a procedure for setting the reserved recording reserved by the user in the program information transmitting apparatus 110. The program information transmitting apparatus 110 has a function of responding simultaneously with an overlapping reservation at the time of reservation overlapping response. is there. The scheduled recording setting process in the program information receiving apparatus 140 is executed by the network scheduled recording application 2611 as a scheduled recording sequence.
 S4510:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611の指示に従って、ユーザが選択した番組の予約録画1を設定する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを送信する。メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージの引数は予約する番組の情報を記述した「予約情報1」である。本実施例では、番組情報送信装置110がEpgダイレクト予約録画機能を提供するため、番組アイテムのタイトルとIDプロパティだけで予約設定できる。 S4510: The reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation recording object creation request” message for setting reservation recording 1 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611. The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user. An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 1” in which information of a program to be reserved is described. In this embodiment, since the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the Epg direct reserved recording function, reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
 S4511:「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、予約の重複がなければ、その番組予約を予約管理部414に設定する。予約を受け付た場合は、予約録画を参照するための識別子である予約ID1と、予約結果の情報であるResultを番組情報受信装置140に返す。 S4511: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and sets the program reservation in the reservation management unit 414 if there is no duplication of reservation. When the reservation is received, the program information receiving device 140 returns a reservation ID 1 which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording and a result which is information of a reservation result.
 S4512:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611の指示に従って、ユーザが選択した番組の予約録画2を設定する「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを送信する。メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージの引数は予約する番組の情報を記述した「予約情報2」である。本実施例では、番組情報送信装置110がEpgダイレクト予約録画機能を提供するため、番組アイテムのタイトルとIDプロパティだけで予約設定できる。 S4512: The reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “reservation recording object creation request” message for setting reservation recording 2 of the program selected by the user according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611. The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user. An argument of the “reservation recording object creation request” message is “reservation information 2” in which information of a program to be reserved is described. In this embodiment, since the program information transmitting apparatus 110 provides the Epg direct reserved recording function, reservation can be set only with the title and ID property of the program item.
 S4513:「予約録画オブジェクト作成要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、予約録画2が予約録画1と予約の重複があるため、予約情報2に対応した番組予約を予約管理部414に設定し、番組情報受信装置140へ予約録画を参照するための識別子である予約ID2と予約が重複している応答を返す。 S4513: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation recording object creation request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and sets a program reservation corresponding to the reservation information 2 in the reservation management unit 414 since the reservation recording 2 overlaps with the reservation recording 1 and the program information reception apparatus It returns a response in which the reservation is identical to reservation ID 2, which is an identifier for referring to the reservation recording, to 140.
 S4514:番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529はネットワーク予約録画アプリ2611の指示に従って、予約ID2と重複する予約録画の予約IDを要求する「重複予約ID要求」メッセージを送信する。メッセージの送出先は、ユーザが選択した番組の情報を提供した番組情報送信装置110である。 S4514: The reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 transmits a “duplication reservation ID request” message for requesting a reservation ID of reservation recording overlapping with the reservation ID 2 according to the instruction of the network reservation recording application 2611. The destination of the message is the program information transmitting apparatus 110 which provided the information of the program selected by the user.
 S4515:「重複予約ID要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、予約ID2と重複する予約ID1を応答として、番組情報受信装置140へ返す。 S4515: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 which has received the "duplicate reservation ID request" message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and returns a reservation ID 1 overlapping with the reservation ID 2 to the program information receiving apparatus 140 as a response.
 S4516:重複予約応答を受信した番組情報受信装置140の予約録画設定コントローラ529は、予約ID1を指定し、「予約情報要求」メッセージを番組情報送信装置110へ送信する。 S4516: The reservation recording setting controller 529 of the program information receiving apparatus 140 that has received the duplicate reservation response specifies the reservation ID 1 and transmits a “reservation information request” message to the program information transmission apparatus 110.
 S4517:「予約情報要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、指定された予約ID1の番組情報、開始・終了時刻等を含む予約情報を取得する。取得した予約ID1の予約情報を番組情報受信装置140に応答する。予約情報には、図12、13、14、15、43で示した各プロパティをの情報を含む。
  予約一覧応答を受信した番組情報受信装置140は、後述する図48に示す画面を表示し、操作信号受信部226を介して予約録画1を削除するか否かの入力を受け付ける。
  図48に示す画面において、ユーザが「キャンセル5002」を選択した場合は図45の予約録画設定処理を終了し、「削除5003」を選択した場合はS4518に進む。 S4518:番組情報受信装置140は、予約録画2と重複する予約録画1の予約ID1を指定し、「予約削除要求」メッセージを番組情報送信装置110へ送信する。
S4517: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation information request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414, and acquires reservation information including the program information of the designated reservation ID 1, the start and end times, and the like. The reservation information of the acquired reservation ID 1 is returned to the program information receiving apparatus 140. The reservation information includes information on each property shown in FIGS. 12, 13, 14, 15, and 43.
The program information receiving apparatus 140 having received the reservation list response displays a screen shown in FIG. 48 described later, and receives an input of whether or not to delete the reservation recording 1 via the operation signal receiving unit 226.
In the screen shown in FIG. 48, when the user selects “cancel 5002”, the scheduled recording setting process of FIG. 45 is ended, and when “delete 5003” is selected, the process proceeds to S4518. S4518: The program information reception apparatus 140 designates the reservation ID 1 of the reservation recording 1 overlapping the reservation recording 2, and transmits a “reservation deletion request” message to the program information transmission apparatus 110.
 S4419:「予約削除要求」メッセージを受信した番組情報送信装置110は、予約録画サービス429でそのメッセージを処理する。予約録画サービス429は、予約管理部414を参照し、指定された予約ID1の予約オブジェクトを削除する。削除が実行された場合は、予約削除した応答を番組情報受信装置140に返す。 S4419: The program information transmitting apparatus 110 that has received the “reservation deletion request” message processes the message with the reservation recording service 429. The reservation recording service 429 refers to the reservation management unit 414 and deletes the reservation object of the designated reservation ID 1. When the deletion is executed, the response for which the reservation has been deleted is returned to the program information receiving apparatus 140.
 以上により、予約情報2と重複する予約情報1を削除し、予約情報2を設定することができる。 As described above, the reservation information 1 overlapping with the reservation information 2 can be deleted and the reservation information 2 can be set.
 図46に予約録画サービス429のサービス詳細情報のアクションリストの一例を示す。 FIG. 46 shows an example of the action list of the service detail information of the scheduled recording service 429.
   図に示すように、アクション毎にアクション名と引数リストを設定する。図46では4610、4620、4630、4640、4650が各アクションを示す。アクション4610のアクション名が4611、引数リストが4612である。引数リストには1つ以上の引数の情報を列挙する。 As shown in the figure, set an action name and an argument list for each action. In FIG. 46, 4610, 4620, 4630, 4640, 4650 show each action. The action name of action 4610 is 4611, and the argument list is 4612. The argument list enumerates the information of one or more arguments.
 図46では1行で1つの引数の情報を示している。4691の列は引数名、4692の列は入出力方向(INまたはOUT)、4693の列は型定義名を示す。
  CreateRecordSchedule4611は、予約録画オブジェクト作成要求である。
  DeleteRecordScedule4621は、予約削除要求である。
  GetRecordSchedule4631は、予約IDであるRecordScheduleIDで指定される予約録画の予約情報要求である。
  GetScheduleConflicts4641は、予約IDであるRecordScheduleIDと重複する予約IDを取得する重複予約ID要求である。
  BrowseRecordSchedule4651は、予約一覧要求である。
In FIG. 46, information of one argument is shown on one line. A column of 4691 indicates an argument name, a column of 4692 indicates an input / output direction (IN or OUT), and a column of 4693 indicates a type definition name.
CreateRecordSchedule 4611 is a scheduled recording object creation request.
Delete Record Scedule 4621 is a reservation deletion request.
GetRecordSchedule 4631 is a reservation information request for reservation recording specified by RecordScheduleID, which is a reservation ID.
GetScheduleConflicts 464 1 is a duplicate reservation ID request for acquiring a reservation ID overlapping with RecordScheduleID which is a reservation ID.
BrowseRecordSchedule4651 is a reservation list request.
 図47は、図44のS4413で予約重複を受信した際の番組情報受信装置140の画面の一例である。予約録画設定コントローラで予約の重複を受信すると、統合番組表生成アプリ2611は、予約重複ダイヤログ4700を表示する。4701はS4412で指定した予約情報に対応する番組情報である。終了4704を指定すると、予約を設定せず番組表に戻り、4703を指定すると、統合番組表生成アプリ2611は、予約一覧を表示するために予約録画コントローラに予約一覧取得を依頼する。 FIG. 47 shows an example of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation duplication is received in S4413 of FIG. When the reservation recording setting controller receives duplication of reservation, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 displays a reservation duplication dialog 4700. 4701 is program information corresponding to the reservation information specified in S4412. When the end 4704 is designated, the program guide is returned to the program guide without setting the reservation, and when 4703 is designated, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 requests the reservation recording controller to obtain the reservation list to display the reservation list.
 図48は、図45のS4517で予約重複する予約IDの予約情報を受信した際の番組情報受信装置140の画面の一例である。なお、予約録画設定コントローラ529で予約の重複を受信すると、統合番組表生成アプリ2611は、予約重複ダイヤログ4700を表示する。 FIG. 48 is an example of a screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation information of the reservation ID for which the reservation overlap occurs in S4517 of FIG. 45 is received. When the reservation recording setting controller 529 receives a duplication of reservation, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 displays a reservation duplication dialog 4700.
 4804、4805は、S4517で受信した予約ID1に対応する予約情報1に含まれる予約録画情報である。終了4807を指定すると番組表に戻り、4806を指定すると、統合番組表生成アプリ2611は、予約一覧を表示するために予約録画コントローラに予約一覧取得を依頼する。 4804 and 4805 are reservation recording information included in the reservation information 1 corresponding to the reservation ID 1 received in S4517. When the end 4807 is specified, the program guide is returned to, and when 4806 is specified, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 requests the reservation recording controller to acquire the reservation list in order to display the reservation list.
 図49は、図44のS4415で予約一覧を受信した際の番組情報受信装置140の画面の一例である。予約一覧4900には、予約録画の情報に併せ、情報4910欄に予約が重複していることを示す重複マーク4902、4903を表示し、ユーザはリモコン230の操作により修正する予約を指定する。 FIG. 49 shows an example of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation list is received in S4415 of FIG. In the reservation list 4900, duplication marks 4902 and 4903 indicating that reservations are duplicated are displayed in the information 4910 column together with information on reservation recording, and the user designates a reservation to be corrected by operating the remote control 230.
 図50は、図49で指定した削除対象の予約録画を表示する番組情報受信装置140の画面の一例である。予約削除ダイヤログ5000には、削除対象の予約録画情報5001を表示し、キャンセル5002を指定すると削除を行わず予約一覧に戻り、削除5003を指定すると、指定した予約録画情報に対応する予約IDを引数に予約削除要求S4416を実行する。 FIG. 50 shows an example of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 for displaying the scheduled recording to be deleted designated in FIG. In the reservation deletion dialog 5000, the reservation recording information 5001 to be deleted is displayed, and when the cancellation 5002 is specified, the deletion is not performed and the program returns to the reservation list, and when the deletion 5003 is specified, the reservation ID corresponding to the specified reservation recording information The reservation deletion request S4416 is executed on the argument.
 図51は、図45のS4517で予約重複する予約IDの予約情報を受信した際の番組情報受信装置140の画面の図48とは別の画面の一例である。予約録画設定コントローラ529で予約の重複を受信すると、統合番組表生成アプリ2611は、予約重複ダイヤログ5100を表示する。 FIG. 51 is an example of a screen different from FIG. 48 of the screen of the program information receiving apparatus 140 when the reservation information of the reservation ID for which the reservation overlap occurs in S4517 of FIG. 45 is received. When the reservation recording setting controller 529 receives the duplication of the reservation, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 displays a reservation duplication dialog 5100.
 5101は、S4512で送信した予約ID2に対応する予約録画情報である。5102は、S4517で受信した予約ID1に対応する予約情報1に含まれる予約録画情報である。終了4807を指定すると番組表に戻り、4806を指定すると、統合番組表生成アプリ2611は、予約一覧を表示するために予約録画コントローラ529に予約一覧取得を依頼する。 Reference numeral 5101 denotes reservation video recording information corresponding to the reservation ID 2 transmitted in S4512. Reference numeral 5102 denotes reservation video recording information included in the reservation information 1 corresponding to the reservation ID 1 received in S4517. When the end 4807 is specified, the program guide is returned to, and when 4806 is specified, the integrated program guide generation application 2611 requests the reservation recording controller 529 to obtain the reservation list in order to display the reservation list.
 ユーザはリモコン230の操作により、キャンセル5105を指定すると予約録画削除を行わず、予約が重複したまま番組表3500に戻り、5103、5104を選択することにより削除対象の予約録画を指定し、決定5106を指定すると、予約録画コントローラ529は、予約ID1を削除する予約削除要求を実行する。 When the user designates the cancel 5105 by operating the remote control 230, the user does not perform the reservation recording deletion, returns to the program schedule 3500 while the reservation is duplicated, selects the reservation recording to be deleted by selecting 5103 and 5104, and decides 5106 When is designated, the reservation recording controller 529 executes a reservation deletion request to delete the reservation ID 1.
 図52は、図44、45で示した手順の予約重複応答に重複予約を含む場合と含まない場合の番組情報受信装置140の処理フローである。
S5201:図44におけるS4413、図45における4513で予約録画オブジェクト作成要求の応答を受信する。
  S5202:予約の重複を確認し、重なりが無ければ終了する。
  S5203:S5202で予約の重複を検出した場合、応答に予約IDがあるか確認する。
  S5204:S5203で予約IDが無い場合、ユーザに予約一覧表示するか否か確認し、ユーザが予約一覧を要求しない場合、終了する。
  S5205:S5204でユーザが予約一覧を要求した場合、予約一覧要求を送信する。
  S5206:応答として取得した予約一覧を表示する。
FIG. 52 is a process flow of the program information receiving apparatus 140 in the case where the reservation duplication response of the procedure shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 includes and does not include duplication reservation.
S5201: A response to the reservation video recording object creation request is received at S4413 in FIG. 44 and 4513 in FIG.
S5202: Confirm duplication of reservation, and if there is no duplication, the process ends.
S5203: When the duplication of the reservation is detected in S5202, it is confirmed whether there is a reservation ID in the response.
S5204: If there is no reservation ID in S5203, the user confirms whether or not to display the reservation list, and if the user does not request the reservation list, the process ends.
S5205: When the user requests a reservation list in S5204, the reservation list request is transmitted.
S5206: The reservation list acquired as a response is displayed.
 S5207:S5203で予約IDがある場合、重複予約要求を送信し、受信した予約IDと重複する予約録画の予約IDを取得し、取得した予約IDを引数に予約情報要求を送信し、指定した予約IDに対応する予約情報を応答として取得する。
  S5208:応答として取得した予約情報を表示する。
S5207: If there is a reservation ID in S5203, send a duplicate reservation request, acquire the reservation ID of the reservation recording overlapping the received reservation ID, send the reservation information request with the acquired reservation ID as an argument, and specify the specified reservation Get reservation information corresponding to the ID as a response.
S5208: Display the reservation information acquired as a response.
 以上、説明した通り本実施例では、EPGクライアント搭載機器である番組情報受信装置140は、ネットワークに接続されたEPGサーバ搭載機器である番組情報送信装置110を探索し、EPG情報を取得し、ネットワークに接続された録画サーバ搭載機器である録画装置140を探索し、その情報から電子番組表画面を生成しユーザに提示する。そして、提示された番組を選択して予約録画する手段をユーザに与え、予約録画が重複した場合に予約録画を修正する手段をユーザに与える。そのため、ユーザは操作している機器へ予約録画を設定する場合と同じ感覚で、ネットワーク経由で番組情報送信装置110に録画装置140へのネットワーク録画を行う予約録画を設定できる。 As described above, in the present embodiment, the program information receiving apparatus 140, which is an EPG client mounted apparatus, searches for the program information transmitting apparatus 110, which is an EPG server mounted apparatus connected to the network, and acquires EPG information. The recording device 140, which is a recording server-equipped device connected to the device, is searched, and an electronic program guide screen is generated from the information and presented to the user. Then, the user is provided with means for selecting the presented program and performing scheduled recording, and the user is provided with means for correcting the scheduled recording when the scheduled recording is duplicated. Therefore, the user can set scheduled recording for performing network recording on the recording device 140 in the program information transmitting device 110 via the network in the same way as setting scheduled recording for the device being operated.
 なお、本発明は上記した実施例に限定されるものではなく、様々な変形例が含まれる。例えば、上記した実施例は本発明を分かりやすく説明するために詳細に説明したものであり、必ずしも説明した全ての構成を備えるものに限定されるものではない。また、ある実施例の構成の一部を他の実施例の構成に置き換えることが可能であり、また、ある実施例の構成に他の実施例の構成を加えることも可能である。また、各実施例の構成の一部について、他の構成の追加・削除・置換をすることが可能である。 The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, but includes various modifications. For example, the embodiments described above are described in detail in order to explain the present invention in an easy-to-understand manner, and are not necessarily limited to those having all the configurations described. Also, part of the configuration of one embodiment can be replaced with the configuration of another embodiment, and the configuration of another embodiment can be added to the configuration of one embodiment. In addition, with respect to a part of the configuration of each embodiment, it is possible to add, delete, and replace other configurations.
 また、上記の各構成、機能、処理部、処理手段等は、それらの一部又は全部を、例えば集積回路で設計する等によりハードウェアで実現してもよい。また、上記の各構成、機能等は、プロセッサがそれぞれの機能を実現するプログラムを解釈し、実行することによりソフトウェアで実現してもよい。各機能を実現するプログラム、テーブル、ファイル等の情報は、メモリや、ハードディスク、SSD(Solid State Drive)等の記録装置、または、ICカード、SDカード、DVD等の記録媒体に置くことができる。 Further, each of the configurations, functions, processing units, processing means, etc. described above may be realized by hardware, for example, by designing part or all of them with an integrated circuit. Further, each configuration, function, etc. described above may be realized by software by the processor interpreting and executing a program that realizes each function. Information such as a program, a table, and a file for realizing each function can be placed in a memory, a hard disk, a recording device such as an SSD (Solid State Drive), or a recording medium such as an IC card, an SD card, or a DVD.
 また、制御線や情報線は説明上必要と考えられるものを示しており、製品上必ずしも全ての制御線や情報線を示しているとは限らない。実際には殆ど全ての構成が相互に接続されていると考えてもよい。 Further, control lines and information lines indicate what is considered to be necessary for the description, and not all control lines and information lines in the product are necessarily shown. In practice, almost all configurations may be considered to be mutually connected.
1   ユーザ宅
2、3 放送局
4   公衆ネットワーク網
5   放送用ケーブル
11  放送受信アンテナ
12、13 分配器
14  ルータ
15  アクセスポイント
16  ハブ
110 番組情報送信装置(デジタル放送受信装置)
120 デジタル放送受信装置(STB)
130 デジタル放送受信装置(DTV)
140 番組情報受信装置(デジタル放送受信装置)
150 デジタル放送受信装置(レコーダ)
160 モバイル機器
201 チューナ部
202 復調復号部
203 デマックス部
205 音声デコード部
206 映像デコード部
205 データデコード部
208 合成部
209 ネットワーク接続部
210 記録再生部
211 制御部
213 メモリ
214 入出力部
215 操作I/F部
216 限定受信I/F部
217 限定受信情報記憶部
221 アンテナ接続端子
222 デジタル音声信号出力端子
223 デジタル映像信号出力端子
224 ネットワーク端子
225 入力出力端子
226 操作信号受信部
230 操作装置
301 音声出力部
302 映像表示部
303 入力切替部
304 入力切替部
305 デジタル音声信号入力端子
306 デジタル映像信号入力端子
400、500、2600 制御ソフトウェア
410 番組表生成部
411 番組情報処理部
412 番組情報変換部
413 コンテンツ管理部
414 予約管理部
420 ネットワーク通信処理部
421 メッセージ解析部
422 メッセージ生成部
423 メディア配信サービス
424 機器情報サービス
425 コンテンツディレクトリサービス
426 番組情報提供部
427 コンテンツ情報提供部
428 ストリーミング接続サービス
429 予約録画サービス
450 アプリ管理部
501、2611 ネットワーク予約録画アプリ
510 取得番組表生成部
514 予約設定管理部
523 メディア受信コントローラ
525 コンテンツディテクトリコントローラ
526 番組情報取得部
527 コンテンツ情報取得部
528 ストリーミング接続コントローラ
529 予約録画設定コントローラ
530 機器検出部
2210 放送種別欄
2211 放送システム欄
2212 番組表提供装置欄
2213 放送日蘭2213
2216 チャンネル欄
2217、2218 時間欄
2219 番組欄
2221 チャンネル名欄
2222 アイコン欄
2223 チャンネル番号欄
2230 各番組欄
2231 番組開始時刻表示欄
2232 番組名表示欄
2233 番組説明表示欄
2610 統合番組表生成アプリ
2701 統合EPG欄
2702 ネットEPGアイコン
4000 予約ダイヤログ
Reference Signs List 1 user home 2, 3 broadcast station 4 public network 5 broadcast cable 11 broadcast receiving antenna 12, 13 distributor 14 router 15 access point 16 hub 110 program information transmitting apparatus (digital broadcast receiving apparatus)
120 Digital Broadcasting Receiver (STB)
130 Digital Broadcasting Receiver (DTV)
140 Program Information Receiver (Digital Broadcast Receiver)
150 Digital Broadcasting Receiver (Recorder)
160 mobile device 201 tuner unit 202 demodulation and decoding unit 203 demax unit 205 audio decoding unit 206 video decoding unit 205 data decoding unit 208 combining unit 209 network connection unit 210 recording and reproduction unit 211 control unit 213 memory 214 input / output unit 215 operation I / F Unit 216 Limited reception I / F unit 217 Limited reception information storage unit 221 Antenna connection terminal 222 Digital audio signal output terminal 223 Digital video signal output terminal 224 Network terminal 225 Input output terminal 226 Operation signal reception unit 230 Operation device 301 Audio output unit 302 Video display unit 303 Input switching unit 304 Input switching unit 305 Digital audio signal input terminal 306 Digital video signal input terminal 400, 500, 2600 Control software 410 Program guide generation unit 411 Program information processing unit 4 2 program information conversion unit 413 content management unit 414 reservation management unit 420 network communication processing unit 421 message analysis unit 422 message generation unit 423 media distribution service 424 device information service 425 content directory service 426 program information provision unit 427 content information provision unit 428 streaming Connection service 429 Scheduled recording service 450 Application management unit 501, 2611 Network reservation recording application 510 Acquisition program table generation unit 514 Reservation setting management unit 523 Media reception controller 525 Content detection controller 526 Program information acquisition unit 527 Content information acquisition unit 528 Streaming connection Controller 529 Scheduled recording setting controller 530 Device detection unit 2210 Broadcast type column 2211 Broadcast system 2212 program guide providing apparatus column 2213 broadcast date orchid 2213
2216 channel column 2217, 2218 time column 2219 program column 2221 channel name column 2222 icon column 2223 channel number column 2230 each program column 2231 program start time display column 2232 program name display column 2233 program description display column 2610 integrated program guide generation application 2701 integration EPG field 2702 net EPG icon 4000 reservation dialog

Claims (3)

  1.  番組情報送信装置であって、
     他の装置に提供され、前記番組情報送信装置を制御するコマンドについて記述した機器記述情報を作成する機器記述情報作成手段と、
     ネットワークを介して接続された前記他の装置と通信を行い、前記機器記述情報に基づいて作成された前記コマンドを受信し、前記機器記述情報と、前記コマンドに対する応答を送信する、ネットワーク接続手段と、
     デジタル放送信号から取得された、番組についての属性を記述した第一の番組情報に基づいて第二の番組情報を生成する番組情報変換手段と、
     (1)前記第二の番組情報を受信した前記他の装置から、前記機器記述情報に基づいて作成された、前記他の装置において指定された第二の番組の録画予約を要求する録画予約コマンドを受信した場合に、前記第二の番組の録画設定を行い、前記第二の番組と、すでに録画予約を受け付けている第一の番組と、が重複している場合に、前記第二の番組の録画予約コマンドへの応答に予約が重複していることを示す情報を含め、
     (2)前記予約が重複していることを示す情報を含めた応答を受信した前記他の装置から、前記機器記述情報に基づいて作成された、前記第一の番組に関する情報を要求する重複予約要求コマンドを受信した場合に、前記第一の番組の録画予約に関する情報を前記重複予約コマンドの応答に含め、
     (3)前記第一の番組に関する情報を受信した前記他の装置から、前記機器記述情報に基づいて作成された、前記第一の番組の録画予約の削除を要求する予約削除要求コマンドを受信した場合に、前記第一の番組の録画予約を削除する、録画予約手段と、
     前記録画予約手段が設定した録画予約された番組を録画する録画手段と、 
     を備えることを特徴とする番組情報送信装置。
    A program information transmitter,
    Device description information creation means for creating device description information which is provided to another device and which describes a command for controlling the program information transmission device;
    A network connection unit that communicates with the other device connected via the network, receives the command created based on the device description information, and transmits the device description information and a response to the command ,
    Program information conversion means for generating second program information based on first program information describing attributes of a program acquired from a digital broadcast signal;
    (1) A recording reservation command for requesting recording reservation of a second program specified in the other device, created based on the device description information, from the other device that has received the second program information Setting the recording of the second program, and when the second program and the first program for which recording reservation has already been received overlap, the second program In the response to the recording reservation command of, including information indicating that the reservation is duplicated,
    (2) Duplicate reservation for requesting information related to the first program created based on the device description information from the other device that has received a response including information indicating that the reservation is duplicated When the request command is received, information on the recording reservation of the first program is included in the response of the duplicate reservation command,
    (3) A reservation deletion request command for requesting deletion of the recording reservation of the first program created based on the device description information is received from the other device that has received the information on the first program Recording reservation means for deleting the recording reservation of the first program,
    Recording means for recording a program reserved for recording set by the recording reservation means;
    A program information transmitting apparatus comprising:
  2.  番組情報受信装置であって、
     ユーザからの入力を受け付ける操作手段と、
     ネットワークを介して接続された他の装置と通信を行い、前記他の装置を制御するコマンドについて記述した機器記述情報と、前記機器記述情報に基づき作成されたコマンドに対する応答を受信し、前記他の装置に前記機器記述情報に基づき作成されたコマンドを送信するネットワーク接続手段と、
     (1)前記機器記述情報に基づいて、番組情報の送信を要求する番組要求コマンドを生成し、
     (2)前記操作手段により、受信した前記番組情報から第二の番組の録画予約を受け付けた場合に、前記機器記述情報に基づき、前記第二の番組の録画予約を要求する録画予約要求コマンドを生成し、
     (3)前記第二の番組と、前記他の装置にすでに録画予約されていた第一の番組と、が重複することを示す情報が含まれる応答を前記他の装置から受信した場合に、前記機器記述情報に基づき、前記第一の番組の予約に関する情報を要求する重複予約要求コマンドを生成し、
     (4)前記重複予約要求コマンドに応じて前記他の装置から送信された前記第一の番組関する情報を前記他の機器から受信した場合に、前記機器記述情報に基づき、前記第一の番組の録画予約の削除を要求する予約削除要求コマンドを生成する、予約録画設定手段と、
     を備えることを特徴とする番組情報受信装置。
    A program information receiving apparatus,
    Operation means for receiving input from a user;
    It communicates with another device connected via a network, receives device description information describing a command for controlling the other device, and receives a response to a command created based on the device description information, and the other Network connection means for transmitting to the device a command created based on the device description information;
    (1) A program request command for requesting transmission of program information is generated based on the device description information,
    (2) When a recording reservation of the second program is received from the received program information by the operation means, a recording reservation request command for requesting a recording reservation of the second program based on the device description information is provided. Generate
    (3) In the case where a response including information indicating that the second program and the first program which has been reserved for recording in the other device overlap is received from the other device, Generating a duplicate reservation request command for requesting information on reservation of the first program based on the device description information;
    (4) When the information related to the first program transmitted from the other device in response to the duplicate reservation request command is received from the other device, based on the device description information, the first program Reservation recording setting means for generating a reservation deletion request command for requesting deletion of a recording reservation;
    A program information receiving apparatus comprising:
  3.  ネットワークを介して接続された他の装置と通信を行い、情報およびコマンドの送受信を行う番組情報送信装置に用いられる番組情報送信方法であって、
     前記他の装置に提供され、前記番組情報送信装置を制御するコマンドについて記述した機器記述情報を作成する機器記述情報作成ステップと、
     デジタル放送信号から取得された、番組についての属性を記述した第一の番組情報に基づいて第二の番組情報を生成する番組情報変換ステップと、
     (1)前記第二の番組情報を受信した前記他の装置から、前記機器記述情報に基づいて作成された、前記他の装置において指定された第二の番組の録画予約を要求する録画予約コマンドを受信した場合に、前記第二の番組の録画設定を行い、前記第二の番組と、すでに録画予約を受け付けている第一の番組と、が重複している場合に、前記第二の番組の録画予約コマンドへの応答に予約が重複していることを示す情報を含め、
     (2)前記予約が重複していることを示す情報を含めた応答を受信した前記他の装置から、前記機器記述情報に基づいて作成された、前記第一の番組に関する情報を要求する重複予約要求コマンドを受信した場合に、前記第一の番組の録画予約に関する情報を前記重複予約コマンドの応答に含め、
     (3)前記第一の番組に関する情報を受信した前記他の装置から、前記機器記述情報に基づいて作成された、前記第一の番組の録画予約の削除を要求する予約削除要求コマンドを受信した場合に、前記第一の番組の録画予約を削除する、録画予約ステップと、
     前記録画予約手段が設定した録画予約された番組を録画する、録画ステップと、 
     を備えることを特徴とする番組情報送信方法。
    A program information transmission method used for a program information transmission apparatus, which communicates with another apparatus connected via a network and transmits and receives information and commands.
    A device description information creation step of creating device description information which is provided to the other device and describes a command for controlling the program information transmission device;
    A program information conversion step of generating second program information based on first program information describing attributes of a program acquired from a digital broadcast signal;
    (1) A recording reservation command for requesting recording reservation of a second program specified in the other device, created based on the device description information, from the other device that has received the second program information Setting the recording of the second program, and when the second program and the first program for which recording reservation has already been received overlap, the second program In the response to the recording reservation command of, including information indicating that the reservation is duplicated,
    (2) Duplicate reservation for requesting information related to the first program created based on the device description information from the other device that has received a response including information indicating that the reservation is duplicated When the request command is received, information on the recording reservation of the first program is included in the response of the duplicate reservation command,
    (3) A reservation deletion request command for requesting deletion of the recording reservation of the first program created based on the device description information is received from the other device that has received the information on the first program A recording reservation step of deleting the recording reservation of the first program;
    A recording step of recording a program reserved for recording set by the recording reservation means;
    A program information transmission method comprising:
PCT/JP2012/001364 2012-02-29 2012-02-29 Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method WO2013128487A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2012/001364 WO2013128487A1 (en) 2012-02-29 2012-02-29 Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2012/001364 WO2013128487A1 (en) 2012-02-29 2012-02-29 Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013128487A1 true WO2013128487A1 (en) 2013-09-06

Family

ID=49081756

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/001364 WO2013128487A1 (en) 2012-02-29 2012-02-29 Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2013128487A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030023987A1 (en) * 2001-05-29 2003-01-30 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Program recording system, remote controller, and method and program for remote control
JP2005079955A (en) * 2003-09-01 2005-03-24 Sony Corp Recorder, and recording reservation method
JP2007129659A (en) * 2005-11-07 2007-05-24 Sony Corp Program reservation system, recording device, and remote controller

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030023987A1 (en) * 2001-05-29 2003-01-30 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Program recording system, remote controller, and method and program for remote control
JP2005079955A (en) * 2003-09-01 2005-03-24 Sony Corp Recorder, and recording reservation method
JP2007129659A (en) * 2005-11-07 2007-05-24 Sony Corp Program reservation system, recording device, and remote controller

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SHIRO SAKATA: "Joho Kaden Network to Tsushin Hoso Renkei -IPTV de Jitsugen suru Kateinai Ubiquitous-, 1st edition, The Institute of Electrical Engineers of Japan", 25 December 2008 (2008-12-25), pages 117 - 133 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN102047679B (en) Device for recording and playing contents, server for managing content location information, information recording medium, method for managing content information
US8046808B2 (en) Communication of TV-Anytime CRIDs
JP6316196B2 (en) Reception device, reception method, transmission device, transmission method, and program
US20100146547A1 (en) Method of transmitting and receiving broadcast signal and apparatus for receiving broadcast signal
KR100728256B1 (en) Homenetwork/Broadcast Linkage System and Method for using Multimedia Contents between Home Network and Broadcast
JP5782524B2 (en) Video signal transmission / reception method, display device, and decoding device
US20120144428A1 (en) Content searching
US20030041327A1 (en) System with improved user interface
JP5934591B2 (en) Program information transmitting apparatus, program information receiving apparatus, and program information transmitting method
JP2016167849A (en) Program information transmitter, program information receiver, and program information transmission method
CN1656793B (en) Transmission system and receiver of the system
WO2013128487A1 (en) Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method
JP5923600B2 (en) Digital broadcast receiving device, control device, and program reservation method
WO2013035214A1 (en) Program information transmission device, program information reception device, and program information transmission method
JP2013070199A (en) Program information transmitter, program information receiver, and program information transmission method
WO2014010069A1 (en) Video transmission method, caption display device, and video transmission device
JPWO2013128487A1 (en) Program information transmitting apparatus, program information receiving apparatus, and program information transmitting method
KR100835137B1 (en) Broadcasting system, method and recording medium for providing epg service coupled with information
JP2013058953A (en) Program information transmitter, program information receiver, and program information transmission method
JP2013058952A (en) Program information transmitter, program information receiver, and program information transmission method
JPWO2019230269A1 (en) Information processing equipment, information processing methods, and programs
JP2001359060A (en) Data broadcast service transmitter, data broadcast service receiver, data broadcast service transmission method, data broadcast service reception method, data broadcast service production aid system, index information generator and digital broadcast reception system
JP2013058951A (en) Program information transmitter, program information receiver, and program information transmission method
JP2015126403A (en) Digital broadcast receiver
KR101272260B1 (en) Virtual-channel configuration method and digital broadcasting receiver apparatus using the same method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12869605

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2014501823

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12869605

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1